Yaskawa F7 Drive Installation Guide

PDF

Dokument

Reklama

YASKAWA

Varispeed F7S

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

SUPER ENERGY-SAVING VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE

MODEL: CIMR-F7S

200V CLASS 0.4 to 75kW (1.2 to 110kVA)

400V CLASS 0.4 to 300kW (1.4 to 510kVA)

Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions thoroughly, and retain for future reference.

YASKAWA MANUAL NO. TOEP C710616 16B

©

2007 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

Preface

This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of Varispeed F7S-Series Inverters. Read this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.

General Precautions

• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.

Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the instructions described in this manual.

• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.

• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.

• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.

• If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.

Safety Information

The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.

Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.

Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending on the situation.

Indicates important information that should be memorized.

IMPORTANT

Safety Precautions

 Confirmations upon Delivery

CAUTION

• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.

Doing so can result in injury.

 Installation

CAUTION

• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.

If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.

• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.

Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.

• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45 ° C.

Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.

 Wiring

WARNING

• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.

Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.

• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.

Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.

• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class:

Ground to 10 Ω or less)

Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.

• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.

Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)

• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.

Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.

• If the power supply is turned ON during the FWD (or REV) Run Command is given, the motor will start automatically.

Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the RUN signal is OFF.

Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal constant is set.

Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

• The IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets mounted in the rotor.

Unlike the induction motor, high motor-terminal voltage is generated while the motor is running, even when the Inverter power is OFF. Maintenance, inspection, or wiring must be done while the motor is stopped.

Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.

• For applications where the overhauling load causes the motor to turn even when the Inverter power is OFF, be sure to connect a low-voltage manual starter on the Inverter's output side.

Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.

iii

CAUTION

• Motors of any other type, such as induction motors, can be connected only in the sequence test mode (A1-02=0). This Inverter is used exclusively for IPM motor drives.

Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to the Inverter or the motors.

• If connecting a motor in the sequence test mode (A1-02=0), the motor must be separated from the load (machine, equipment, etc).

Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or damage to the product.

• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the

Inverter.

Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.

• Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.

Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.

• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring examples.

Otherwise, a fire can occur and the Inverter, braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units can be damaged.

• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.

Otherwise, a fire may occur.

• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.

The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.

• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.

The Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt if these devices are connected.

• Do not connect magnetic contactors to the output circuits.

If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the

Inverter to operate.

• Do not ground nor connect the AC terminal on the control circuit to the unit.

Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.

 Setting User Constants

CAUTION

• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing PG home position offset.

The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set with the motor attached to a load.

• Stay clear of the motor until PG home position offset has been successfully completed.

The motor could stop and then start again unexpectedly and this could result in injury.

• Always confirm the following before PG home position offset:

• The lock key has been removed from the motor shaft.

• There are neither people nor objects around the motor shaft.

• The motor is at a complete stop.

Failure to do so may result in injury.

• Be careful when handling the shaft and coupling.

Failure to do so may result in injury.

• Be careful not to injure yourself with the key groove when turning the motor shaft by hand.

Failure to do so may result in injury.

• For an initial operation or the first operation after replacing the Inverter or the motor, correctly set the motor constants. Then, be sure to double check if the settings were correctly made.

If the settings are incorrect, the overhauling load might cause the motor to turn because of insufficient torque, or the motor might not run in accordance with an issued command (reverses, does not move, or shortly accelerates).

 Trial Operation

WARNING

• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.

An electric shock may occur.

• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared, the machine may start moving suddenly.

Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.

Injury may occur.

• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its function is set.

Injury may occur.

• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.

Injury may occur.

CAUTION

• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can become very hot.

Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.

• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.

Otherwise, an injury may occur.

• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.

Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the Inverter.

Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.

• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.

Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.

• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.

Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.

• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings. For the

Inverters in the 400 V class of 75 kW or more, however, select the correct connector according to the input voltage.

Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.

• For the initial operation or the first operation after replacing the motor, set the motor constants before starting operation. Also, reconfirm the motor constants after they have been set.

Improper setting may cause the Inverter to malfunction. Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to the equipments, motors or Inverter.

 Maintenance and Inspection

WARNING

• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous.

Doing so can result in electric shock.

• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.

Doing so can result in electric shock.

• Turn OFF the main circuit power supply, wait for the time indicated on the front cover, and make sure the CHARGE indicator light has gone out, and then perform maintenance and inspection.

The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.

WARNING

• Maintenance or inspection must be done while the motor is stopped.

Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.

• Do not carry out maintenance or inspections for at least 5 minutes after the low-voltage manual switching device on the output side is turned OFF.

Because the IPM motor contains a permanent magnet, voltage occurs between the terminals during rotation even if power is not applied. This voltage is dangerous and may cause electric shock.

• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel.

Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.

Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.

• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.

Always make any adjustments other than those involving the operation of the Inverter with the holding brake released.

Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.

• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.

Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.

CAUTION

• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully.

The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.

• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.

Doing so can result in personal injury.

 Other

• Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.

Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.

WARNING

CAUTION

• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, at any time even during transportation or installation.

Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.

Warning Information and Position

There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration.

Always heed the warnings.

Warning information position

Illustration shows the CIMR-F7S20P4

Illustration shows the CIMR-F7S2022

Warning Information

WARNING

Risk of electric shock.

Read manual before installing.

Wait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge after disconnecting power supply.

After opening the manual switch between

the drive and motor, please wait 5 minutes

before inspecting, performing maintenance

or wiring the drive.

AVERTISSEMENT

Risque de décharge électrique.

Lire le manuel avant l' installation.

Attendre 5 minutes aprés la coupure de

l' allmentation. Pour permettre la

décharge des condensateurs.

Après avoir déconnécte la protection

entra le drive et le moteur, veuillez

patienter 5 minutes avant d' inspecter,

d' effectuer une opération de montage

ou de câblage du variateur.

vii

viii

Warranty Information

 Free Warranty Period and Scope

Warranty Period

This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa’s customer or if applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa’s factory whichever comes first.

Scope of Warranty

Inspections

Periodic inspections must be conducted by the customer. However, upon request, Yaskawa or one of Yaskawa’s Service Centers can inspect the product for a fee. In this case, if after conferring with the customer, a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period, then this fee will be waived and the problem remedied free of charge.

Repairs

If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period, Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defective product, and provide shipping to and from the site free of charge.

However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with a

Yaskawa product is not due to defects in Yaskawa’s workmanship or materials, then the customer will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are outside the scope of this warranty are:

•

Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where the customer is determined to be responsible.

Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yaskawa’s understanding.

Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recommended specifications.

Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.

• Or other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.

Warranty service is only applicable within Japan.

However, after-sales service is available for customers outside of Japan for a reasonable fee.

Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information.

 Exceptions

Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa's defective products whether within or outside the warranty period are NOT covered by this warranty.

 Restrictions

• The Varispeed F7S was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or health.

•

Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation, health care, space aviation, atomic or electric power, or underwater use must contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office beforehand.

This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood of any accident.

Registered Trademarks

The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.

• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,

Inc.).

•

InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.

ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.

L ON W ORKS is a registered trademark of the Echelon.

Before Reading This Manual

This manual explains both the conventional Varispeed F7S-Series Inverters and the F7S-series

Inverters with SPEC: C or later.

The shaded sections or those specified as being for SPEC: C or later apply only to F7S-series

Inverters with SPEC: C or later (Inverter with design revision order of C or later.)

Be certain to check the specification on the Inverter nameplate.

Example of Inverter Nameplate

D es i gn rev i s i on order

(52

52'%2%

8#M8#

24)224

(+.'01'

24)

 Precautions when Using a F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: B or Earlier

The design revision number and software version of the F7S-series Inverters with SPEC: C or later have been modified as shown in the table below. The design revision order and software version can be found on the Inverter nameplate. When using a F7S-series Inverter with SPEC:

B or earlier, observe the following precautions.

Inverter

Inverter with SPEC: B or earlier

Inverter with SPEC: C or later

Design Revision Order

A or B

C or later

Software Version

PRG:103

PRG:104

Precautions

• The factory settings of C6-01 (CT/VT selection) and the constants related to C6-01 of the

F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: B or earlier are different from those of the F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: C or later.

Refer to Application and Overload Selections of Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function , and set the constants according to your application.

• The COPY function of the Digital Operator for the F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: B or earlier is limited because of the software version different from that of the F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: C or later.

Set the related constants, referring to Application and Overload Selections of Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function .

1

2

Safety Information ...........................................................................................ii

Safety Precautions .........................................................................................iii

Warning Information and Position .................................................................vii

Warranty Information .................................................................................... viii

Registered Trademarks ..................................................................................ix

Before Reading This Manual ..........................................................................ix

Handling Inverters ...................................................................1-1

Varispeed F7S Introduction .......................................................................... 1-2

Varispeed F7S Applications............................................................................................ 1-2

Varispeed F7S Models ................................................................................................... 1-2

Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................ 1-4

Checks ........................................................................................................................... 1-4

Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-4

Component Names ........................................................................................................ 1-6

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .............................................................. 1-7

Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-7

Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] ..................................................... 1-8

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site............................................ 1-10

Installation Site ............................................................................................................. 1-10

Controlling the Ambient Temperature........................................................................... 1-10

Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter ................................................................. 1-10

Installation Orientation and Space.............................................................. 1-11

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................. 1-12

Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-12

Attaching the Terminal Cover ....................................................................................... 1-12

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................ 1-13

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less ........................................................................................ 1-13

Inverters of 22 kW or More........................................................................................... 1-16

Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover .......................................... 1-17

Removing the Protection Cover ................................................................................... 1-17

Attaching the Protection Cover..................................................................................... 1-18

Wiring .......................................................................................2-1

Connections to Peripheral Devices .............................................................. 2-2

Connection Diagram .................................................................................... 2-3

Terminal Block Configuration ....................................................................... 2-5

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals....................................................................... 2-6

Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6

Main Circuit Terminal Functions................................................................................... 2-12

3

4

Main Circuit Configurations...........................................................................................2-13

Standard Connection Diagrams....................................................................................2-14

Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................2-15

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-23

Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ......................................................................2-23

Control Circuit Terminal Functions ...............................................................................2-25

Control Circuit Terminal Connections ...........................................................................2-29

Control Circuit Wiring Precautions................................................................................2-30

Wiring Check ..............................................................................................2-31

Checks..........................................................................................................................2-31

Installing and Wiring Option Cards .............................................................2-32

Option Card Models and Specifications........................................................................2-32

Installation.....................................................................................................................2-33

PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications..................................................2-34

Wiring............................................................................................................................2-35

Wiring Terminal Blocks .................................................................................................2-36

Digital Operator and Modes................................................... 3-1

Digital Operator ............................................................................................3-2

Digital Operator Display..................................................................................................3-2

Digital Operator Keys......................................................................................................3-2

Modes...........................................................................................................3-5

Inverter Modes................................................................................................................3-5

Switching Modes.............................................................................................................3-6

Drive Mode .....................................................................................................................3-7

Quick Programming Mode ..............................................................................................3-8

Advanced Programming Mode .......................................................................................3-9

Verify Mode................................................................................................................... 3-11

Autotuning Mode...........................................................................................................3-12

Trial Operation ........................................................................ 4-1

Overview of Trial Operation Procedure ........................................................4-2

Trial Operation Procedures...........................................................................4-3

Application Confirmation.................................................................................................4-3

Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher).4-3

Power ON .......................................................................................................................4-4

Checking the Display Status ...........................................................................................4-4

Basic Settings .................................................................................................................4-5

Motor Constant Settings .................................................................................................4-7

Application Settings ......................................................................................................4-24

No-load Operation ........................................................................................................4-25

Loaded Operation .........................................................................................................4-25

Check and Recording User Constants .........................................................................4-26

Adjustment Suggestions.............................................................................4-27 xi

xii

5

6 User Constants ........................................................................5-1

User Constant Descriptions.......................................................................... 5-2

Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3

User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode.................................................. 5-4

User Constant Tables ................................................................................... 5-8

A: Setup Settings............................................................................................................ 5-8

Application Constants: b............................................................................................... 5-10

Autotuning Constants: C .............................................................................................. 5-16

Reference Constants: d................................................................................................ 5-20

Motor Constants: E....................................................................................................... 5-25

Option Constants: F ..................................................................................................... 5-30

Terminal Function Constants: H................................................................................... 5-36

Protection Function Constants: L ................................................................................. 5-45

N: Special Adjustments ................................................................................................ 5-54

Digital Operator Constants: o ....................................................................................... 5-55

T: Motor Autotuning...................................................................................................... 5-59

U: Monitor Constants.................................................................................................... 5-61

Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)................................... 5-69

Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)................................. 5-70

Factory Settings that Change with Inverter Capacity Selection (o2-04) and Motor

Capacity Selection (E5-01)........................................................................................... 5-75

Constant Settings by Function...............................................6-1

Application and Overload Selections ........................................................... 6-2

Select the Overload to Suit the Application .................................................................... 6-2

Speed Reference ......................................................................................... 6-5

Selecting the Speed Reference Source ......................................................................... 6-5

Using Multi-Step Speed Operation................................................................................. 6-9

Varispeed F7S Function Block ..................................................................................... 6-12

Run Command ........................................................................................... 6-14

Selecting the Run Command Source ........................................................................... 6-14

Stopping Methods ...................................................................................... 6-16

Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent .................................. 6-16

Using an Emergency Stop............................................................................................ 6-19

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics .......................................... 6-20

Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times............................................................... 6-20

Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function) .................................... 6-24

Preventing Overvoltage During Run............................................................................. 6-25

Adjusting Speed References...................................................................... 6-27

Adjusting Analog Speed References............................................................................ 6-27

Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Speed Function) ............................................. 6-30

Adjusting Speed Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ................................................. 6-32

Speed Limit (Speed Reference Limit Function).......................................... 6-33

Limiting Maximum Speed..............................................................................................6-33

Limiting Minimum Speed...............................................................................................6-33

Machine Protection.....................................................................................6-35

Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) .............................................................6-35

Using Speed Detection .................................................................................................6-38

Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................6-41

Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input .......6-44

Motor Overload Protection............................................................................................6-45

Setting Motor Protection Operation Time .....................................................................6-48

Limiting Motor Rotation Direction..................................................................................6-49

Detecting Motor Overspeed..........................................................................................6-49

Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference .......................6-50

Continuing Operation..................................................................................6-51

Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored........................................................6-51

Speed Search ...............................................................................................................6-53

Continuing Operation During Momentary Power Loss .................................................6-56

Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Speed Reference Is Lost ..................6-58

Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function).............................6-59

Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault (SPEC: C or Later Only).........................6-60

Inverter Protection ......................................................................................6-61

Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors .............................6-61

Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels..........................................6-62

Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................6-63

Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit

Terminals ......................................................................................................................6-63

Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands) ......................................................6-64

Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) .......6-65

Raising and Lowering Speed References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) ...........6-66

Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Speeds in the Analog References

(+/- Speed)....................................................................................................................6-69

Hold Analog Speed Using User-set Timing ..................................................................6-70

Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit

Terminals ......................................................................................................................6-70

Jog Speed Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG).........6-71

Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter

(External Fault Function) ..............................................................................................6-72

Output Terminal Functions..........................................................................6-73

Monitor Constants.......................................................................................6-76

Using the Analog Monitor Constants ............................................................................6-76

Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents .............................................................................6-79

Individual Functions....................................................................................6-81

Using MEMOBUS Communications .............................................................................6-81

Using the Timer Function..............................................................................................6-93

Using PID Control .........................................................................................................6-94

Torque Control (SPEC: C or Later Only) ....................................................................6-104 xiii

xiv

7

8

Speed Control (ASR) Structure .................................................................................. 6-112

Droop Control Function (SPEC: C or Later Only)....................................................... 6-117

Digital Operator Functions........................................................................ 6-119

Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................................. 6-119

Copying Constants ..................................................................................................... 6-122

Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator............................................. 6-126

Setting a Password .................................................................................................... 6-127

Displaying User-set Constants Only........................................................................... 6-128

Options..................................................................................................... 6-129

Performing Speed Control with PG ............................................................................ 6-129

Using Digital Output Boards ....................................................................................... 6-132

Using an Analog Reference Board (SPEC: C or Later Only) ..................................... 6-134

Using a Digital Reference Board (SPEC: C or Later Only)......................................... 6-135

Maintenance Timer Display Function (SPEC: C or Later Only) ............... 6-140

Settings Required to Use Maintenance Timer Display Function ................................ 6-140

Settings Required After Replacement of Cooling Fan or Electrolytic Capacitor......... 6-141

Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-1

Protective and Diagnostic Functions............................................................ 7-2

Fault Detection ............................................................................................................... 7-2

Alarm Detection............................................................................................................ 7-12

Operation Errors........................................................................................................... 7-16

Errors During Autotuning.............................................................................................. 7-18

Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................ 7-18

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 7-20

If Inverter Constants Cannot Be Set............................................................................. 7-20

If the Motor Does Not Operate ..................................................................................... 7-21

If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed........................................................ 7-24

If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow.................................. 7-24

If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference ....................................................... 7-24

If Motor Deceleration is Slow........................................................................................ 7-24

If the Motor Overheats.................................................................................................. 7-25

If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio .......................... 7-26

If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run ............................. 7-26

If There is Mechanical Oscillation................................................................................. 7-26

If Motor Speed Does Not Rise to Speed Reference ..................................................... 7-27

Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-1

Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 8-2

Outline of Free Warranty ................................................................................................ 8-2

Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2

Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2

Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-3

Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive .................................................. 8-3

9

Cooling Fan Replacement Outline..................................................................................8-5

Circulation Fan Replacement Outline ...........................................................................8-14

Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board .......................................8-18

Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1

Standard Inverter Specifications ...................................................................9-2

Specifications by Model ..................................................................................................9-2

Common Specifications ..................................................................................................9-4

Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ........................................9-6

10 Appendix ............................................................................... 10-1

Inverter Application Precautions.................................................................10-2

Selection .......................................................................................................................10-2

Installation.....................................................................................................................10-3

Settings.........................................................................................................................10-3

Handling........................................................................................................................10-3

Motor Application Precautions....................................................................10-5

Applicable Motor ...........................................................................................................10-5

Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)......................10-5

Conformance to UL Standard .....................................................................10-6

Conformance to CE Markings ....................................................................10-8

CE Markings .................................................................................................................10-8

Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings ..........................................................10-8

Wiring Examples.......................................................................................10-15

Using a Braking Resistor Unit.....................................................................................10-15

Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit .........................................................10-16

Using Braking Units in Parallel ...................................................................................10-17

Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel ............................10-18

Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an Internal Power Supply............................................................................................10-19

Using Transistors for Input Signals and a +24-V Common in Sourcing Mode............10-20

Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an External Power Supply ..........................................................................................10-21

Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs................................................................10-22

User Constants .........................................................................................10-23

Revision History

Handling Inverters

This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.

Varispeed F7S Introduction .........................................1-2

Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-4

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions..............................1-7

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........1-10

Installation Orientation and Space ............................. 1-11

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............1-12

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator

and Front Cover.........................................................1-13

Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover..........1-17

-2

Varispeed F7S Introduction

Varispeed F7S Applications

The Varispeed F7S is ideal for the following applications.

• Fan, blower, and pump applications

• Conveyors, pushers, metal tooling machines, etc.

Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation.

Varispeed F7S Models

Voltage

Class

200 V Class

Maximum

Motor

Capacity kW

18.5

3.7

5.5

7.5

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

The Varispeed F7S Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage class es: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 300 kW (39 models).

110

Output

Capacity kVA

1.2

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.7

8.8

Table 1.1 Varispeed F7S Models

Varispeed F7S

Basic Model Number

CIMR-F7S20P4

CIMR-F7S20P7

CIMR-F7S21P5

CIMR-F7S22P2

CIMR-F7S23P7

CIMR-F7S25P5

CIMR-F7S27P5

CIMR-F7S2011

CIMR-F7S2015

CIMR-F7S2018

CIMR-F7S2022

CIMR-F7S2030

CIMR-F7S2037

CIMR-F7S2045

CIMR-F7S2055

CIMR-F7S2075

Specifications

(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)

Open Chassis

(IEC IP00)

CIMR-F7S

Enclosed Wall-mounted

[IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]

CIMR-F7S

20P41

20P71

21P51

22P21

Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.

23P71

25P51

27P51

20111

20220

20300

20370

20450

20550

20750

20151

20181

20221

20301

20371

20451

20551

20751

Varispeed F7S Introduction

Voltage

Class

400 V Class

Maximum

Motor

Capacity kW

18.5

3.7

5.5

7.5

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

110

132

160

185

220

300

Output

Capacity kVA

1.4

1.6

2.8

4.0

5.8

9.5

200

230

280

390

510

110

140

160

CIMR-F7S40P4

CIMR-F7S40P7

CIMR-F7S41P5

CIMR-F7S42P2

CIMR-F7S43P7

CIMR-F7S45P5

CIMR-F7S47P5

CIMR-F7S4011

CIMR-F7S4015

CIMR-F7S4018

CIMR-F7S4022

CIMR-F7S4030

CIMR-F7S4037

CIMR-F7S4045

CIMR-F7S4055

CIMR-F7S4075

CIMR-F7S4090

CIMR-F7S4110

CIMR-F7S4132

CIMR-F7S4160

CIMR-F7S4185

CIMR-F7S4220

CIMR-F7S4300

Table 1.1 Varispeed F7S Models (Continued)

Varispeed F7S

Basic Model Number

Specifications

(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)

Open Chassis

(IEC IP00)

CIMR-F7S

Enclosed Wall-mounted

[IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]

CIMR-F7S

Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.

40P41

40P71

41P51

42P21

43P71

45P51

47P51

40111

40220

40300

40370

40450

40550

40750

40900

41100

41320

41600

41850

42200

43000

40151

40181

40221

40301

40371

40451

40551

40751

40901

41101

41321

41601

-4

Confirmations upon Delivery

Checks

Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.

Item

Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?

Table 1.2 Checks

Method

Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.

Is the Inverter damaged in any way?

Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.

Are any screws or other components loose?

Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.

If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your Yaskawa representative immediately.

Nameplate Information

There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.

Example Nameplate

The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic (Japan) Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW,

IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 (Type 1) standards

Inverter model

Input specifications

Output specifications

Lot number

Serial number

UL file number

(52

52'%2%

8#M8#

24)224

(+.'01'

24)

Inverter specifications

Mass

Software version number

Fig 1.1 Nameplate

Confirmations upon Delivery

Inverter Model Numbers

The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.

CI MR - F7 S 2 0 P 4

I nverter

Var i speed F7

N o .

Spec i f i cat i on

I PM Motor D r i ve

N o .

Vo l tage Cl ass

A C i nput, 3phase, 200 V

A C i nput, 3phase, 400 V

N o .

0 P 4

0 P 7 to

300

Ma x. Motor

0.4

0.7

5 to

300

C kW kW apac kW i ty

" P " i nd i cates the dec i ma l po i nt .

Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers

Inverter Specifications

The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.

N o .

Vo l tage Cl ass

A C i nput, 3phase, 200 V

A C i nput, 3phase, 400 V

D es i gn rev i s i on order

N o .

0 P 4

0 P 7 to

300

Ma x. Motor

0.4 to

300

C kW

0.7

5 kW kW apac i ty

" P " i nd i cates the dec i ma l po i nt .

N o .

Protect i ve Structure

O pen chass i s (IEC I P 00)

E nc l osed wa llmounted (IEC I P 20 ,

NE MA 1 (T ype 1))

Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications

TERMS

Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)

Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the

Inverter is mounted in a control panel.

Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1))

The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 (Type 1) in the USA. The protective covers (see Fig. 1.4

) are required for an IEC IP20 or NEMA 1 (Type 1) protective structure.

-6

Component Names

The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4

. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5

Top protective cover

Mounting hole

Cooling fan

Front cover

Digital

Operator

Terminal cover

Mounting hole

Inverter cover

Front cover

Diecast case

Nameplate

Digital

Operator

Terminal cover

Nameplate

Bottom protective cover

18.5 kW or Less

Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance

22 kW or More

Charge indicator

E (G) FM

S1 S2

-V

RP R+ R- S+ S-

MB MC

M2 E (G)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

R1/L11

R/L1

S1/L21 T1/L21

S/L2 T/L3 U/T1

V/T2 W/T3

18.5 kW or Less 22 kW or More

Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (Examples of Inverters with SPEC: C or later)

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)

Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.

4-d

W1 4-d

W D1

D 3

200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW

W1 t1 t1

(5) W (5) (5) D

* (10) for 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 75 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW.

6-d

200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 75 kW

400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW

(15)

W (15) (5)

400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW

D1 t1

Fig 1.6 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters

-8

Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)]

Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] are shown below.

4-d W1 4-d

200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW

D t1 t1

(5) *

W (5)

(5) D

Grommet

* (7.5) for 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 75 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW.

200 V Class Inverters of 22 to 75kW

400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW

Fig 1.7 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)

Voltage

Class

Max.

Applicable

Motor

Output

[kW]

0.4

200 V

(3-phase)

W H

Open Chassis (IP00)

D W1 H1 H2 D1

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

0.75

1.5

157 39

2.2

3.7

140 280 126 266 7

5.5

7.5

177 59

18.5

200 300 197 186 285

240 350 207 216 335

22 250 400

30 275 450

258

195 385

220 435

7.5

65.5

100

37 298 100

375 600

328

250 575

450 725 348 325 700

12.5

130

0.4

157 39

140 280

177

126 266 7

59 t1

2.3

3.2

400 V

(3-phase)

18.5

5.5

7.5

200 300 197 186 285

240 350 207 216 335

275 450 258 220 435

7.5

65.5

100

325 550 283 260 535 105

110

132

450 725 348 325 700 12.5

500 850 358 370 820 15

130

160 575 910 378 445 855 46 140

2.3

3.2

4.5

Approx.

Mass

Dimensions (mm)

W H

Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA1 (Type 1)]

D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1

Approx.

Mass

Mounting

Holes d*

Caloric Value

(W)

Exter nal

Internal

Total

Heat

Generation

20 39 59

Cooling

Method

140 280

157

126 280 266 7

27 42 69

50 50 100

70 59 129

112 74 186

4 177 59 4

Natural

300

200

310

350

11 240

380

21 254 535

197 186 300 285

207 216 350 335

24 279 615

380 809

258

298

328

195 400 385

220 450 435

250 600 575

453 1027 348 325 725 700

7.5

12.5

135

165

209

302

65.5

100

130

2.3

3.2

164 84 248

219 113 332

374 170 544

429 183 612

501 211 712

586 274 860

865 352 1217

1015 411 1426

Fan

140 280

157

177

126 280 266 7

M10

1266 505 1771

1588 619 2207

2019 838 2857

14 39 53

17 41 58

36 48 84

Natural

59 56 115

80 68 148

127 82 209

193 114 307

6 200 300 197 186 300 285 8 65.5

10 240 350 207 216 350 335 78

2.3

252 158 410

326 172 498

426 208 634

466 259 725

21 279 535 258 220 450 435

7.5

100 24

Fan

36 329

635

715

283 260 550 535

165

105 40

678 317 995

784 360 1144

901 415 1316

1203 495 1698

102

120

453 1027 348 325 725 700 12.5 302

504 1243 358 370 850 820 15 393

130

160 579 1324 378 445 916 855 46 408 140

3.2

4.5

122

130

170

M10

1399 575 1974

1614 671 2285

M12

2097 853 2950

2388 1002 3390

2791 1147 3938

* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.

Table 1.4 400 VAC (185 to 300 kW) Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)

Voltage

Class

Max.

Applicable

Motor

Output

[kW]

400 V

(3-phase)

185

220

300

Dimensions (mm) Heat Generation (W)

Open Chassis (IP00)

Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA1 (Type 1)]

W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1

Approx.

Mass

W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1

Approx.

Mass

Mounting

Holes d*

260

External

3237

710 1305 413 540 240 270 1270 15 125.5

4.5

280 --M12 3740

Internal

1372

1537

Total

Heat

Generation

Cooling

Method

4609

5277

Natural

916 1475 413 730 365 365 1440 15 125.5

4.5

405 5838 2320 8158

-10

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.

Installation Site

Install the Inverter under the following conditions and a pollution level of 2 or less (UL standard).

Table 1.5 Installation Site

Type

Enclosed wall-mounted

Open chassis

Ambient Operating Temperature

-10 to + 40 ° C

-10 to + 45 ° C

Humidity

95% RH or less (no condensation)

Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17 on how to remove the protection covers.

Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.

• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.

•

When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.

Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.

Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.

•

Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.

Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.

Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.

Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.

Controlling the Ambient Temperature

To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 ° C.

Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal powder produced by drilling.

Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.

Installation Orientation and Space

Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.

A mm min.

B mm min.

Air

30 mm min.

50 mm min.

30 mm min.

Horizontal Space

120 mm min.

Vertical Space

Air

400 V Class Inverters of 160 to 220 kW*: A = 120, B = 120

400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW*: A = 300, B = 300

All other Inverters*: A = 50, B = 120

*If, however, there is a fan in the top of the control panel with sufficient exhaust capacity, the following dimensions may be used: A = 50, B = 120.

Fig 1.8 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space

IMPORTANT

1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted [IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)] Inverters.

2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5

kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17 on how to remove the protection covers.

Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or

400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover

Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.

Removing the Terminal Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and then lift the terminal cover up to an angle of about 30 degrees in the direction indicated by arrow 2.

Remove the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 3.

1 Approx. 30

Fig 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7S20P4 Shown Above)

Inverters of 22 kW or More

Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7S2022 Shown Above)

-12

Attaching the Terminal Cover

When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.

For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the grove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and

Front Cover

The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this section.

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

To attach optional boards or change the terminal board connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the terminal cover.

The removal and attachment procedures are given below.

Removing the Digital Operator

Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.

Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-F7S40P4 Shown Above)

-14

Removing the Front Cover

Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.

Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7S40P4 Shown Above)

Mounting the Front Cover

After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover.

1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital

Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.

2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.

Mounting the Digital Operator

After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following procedure.

1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.

2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover

Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator

IMPORTANT

1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.

2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect contact can result.

Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover.

-16

Inverters of 22 kW or More

For Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.

Removing the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

Removing the Front Cover

Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal board in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7S2022 Shown Above)

Attaching the Front Cover

After completing required work, such as mounting an optional board or setting the control circuit terminal board, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.

1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.

2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter.

Attaching the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or less have protection covers on the top and bottom as shown in Fig. 1.4.

Always remove the protection covers before installing an Inverter of 18.5 kW or less in a panel. Use the following procedure to remove and attach a protection cover.

Removing the Protection Cover

Top Protection Cover

Insert the tip of the straightedge screwdriver in the slot. Then, lift the cover up in the direction shown by the arrow to remove it.

Slot

Fig 1.15 Removing the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7S45P5 Shown Above)

Bottom Protection Cover

1. Remove the terminal cover as described on Page 1-12.

2. Loosen the two screws, and remove the protection cover.

3. Return the screws to their original position and tighten (them).

4. Reattach the terminal cover as described on Page 1-12.

Terminal Cover

Screws

Bottom Protection

Cover

Fig 1.16 Removing the Bottom Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7S45P5 Shown Above)

-18

Attaching the Protection Cover

Top Protection Cover

The protection cover has four hooks: two hooks on the bottom and two on the sides. Fit the bottom hooks into the holes, bend the cover slightly, and press the cover down until the hooks on the side snap.

Holes for bottom hooks

Fig 1.17 Attaching the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7S45P5 Shown Above)

Bottom Protection Cover

To attach the bottom protection cover, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

Wiring

This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.

Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2

Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3

Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-23

Wiring Check .............................................................2-31

Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-32

-2

Connections to Peripheral Devices

Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1

Power supply

Molded-case circuit breaker or ground fault interrupter

Magnetic contactor (MC)

AC reactor for power factor improvement

Zero phase reactor

Input noise filter

Braking resistor

Inverter

Varispeed F7

ᧂ౉Ⓜ

DC reactor for power factor improvement

Ground

Output noise filter

Zero phase reactor

Low-voltage manual starter

Ground

Motor

Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices

Connection Diagram

The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2

When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.

2MCCB

Thermal switch contact

Thermal relay trip contact

Braking Unit

(optional)

1 2

3 4

+ 3

Inverter

CIMR-F7S2022

Level detector

U/T1

Braking Resistor Unit

(optional)

Low-voltage manual starter

V/T2

W/T3

Motor

Cooling fan

3-phase power

200 to 240 V

50/60 Hz

1MCCB

2MCCB THRX OFF

Thermal relay trip contact for Braking Resistor Unit

1 2

Thermal relay trip contact for motor cooling fan

1 2

THRX

TRX

MC C MA

Fault contact

Multi-function contact inputs

Factory settings

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

Thermal switch contact for Braking Unit

External fault 3 4

Fault reset

Multi-step speed reference 1

Multi-step speed reference 2

Jog speed selection

Not used

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

External speed references

CN5 (NPN setting)

+24V 8mA

Pulse train input

2 k W

Speed setting adjustment

Speed setter

2 k W

0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA P

0 to 10 V

MEMOBUS communications

RS-485/422

((

R+

R-

S+

S-

E (G)

+24V

Shield wire connection terminal

Master speed pulse train

0 to 32 kHz (3 kW)

High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input

Speed setting power

+15 V, 20 mA

Master speed reference

0 to 10 V (20 kW)

Master speed reference

4 to 20 mA (250 W)

[0 to 10 V (20 k W) input]

Multi-function anlog input

0 to 10 V (20 kW)

Factory setting:

Not used

-V (15V 20mA)

Terminating resistance

(Ground to 100 max.)

PG-X2 TA1

(optional)

(E)

TA1

TA3

TA2

Shield twisted-pair wires

Pulse A

Pulse B

Pulse Z

Pulse monitor output

30 mA max.

30 m max.

Pulse train output

0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k W)

Default:

Output frequency

Ammeter adjustment

20 kW

Multi-function analog output 2

-10 to 10 V 2 mA

Default: Motor speed

0 to +10 V

Tachometer adjustment

20 kW

Multi-function analog output 1

-10 to 10 V 2 mA

Default: Motor speed

0 to +10 V

E(G)

MA A

Error contact output

250 VAC, 10 mA min.

1 A max.

30 VDC, 10 mA min.

1 A max.

Min. load

5 VDC, 10 mA

Multi-function contact oputput

250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.

30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.

Default: Running signal

Min. load

5 VDC, 10 mA

Open collector 1

Default: Zerospeed

Open collector 2

Default: Speed agree signal

Multi-function open-collector outputs

48 VDC 50 mA max.

Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-F7A2022 Shown Above)

-4

IMPORTANT

1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.

Inverters with SPEC: B or earlier

E(G) 㧲㧹 AC AM P1 P2 PC SC

SC A1 A2 +V AC

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7

Inverters with SPEC: C or later

E(G) 㧲㧹 AC AM P1 P2 PC SC

SC A1 A2 A3 +V AC -V

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

R+

R-

S+

S-

MB MC

M2 E(G)

MA MB MC

M1 M2 E(G)

2. The output current capacity of the +V and − V terminals are 20 mA. Do not short-circuit between the +V, − V, and AC terminals. Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.

3. Disable the overvoltage inhibit selection during deceleration (set constant L3-11 to 0) when using a Braking

Resistor Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during deceleration.

4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.

5. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors.

6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring to the PG-X2 Board) is not required for control without a PG.

7. Sequence input signals S1 to S8 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode) for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.

For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V external power supply, refer to Table 2.13

8. The master speed reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.

9. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.

10.DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters for 22 to 75 kW and 400

V Class Inverters for 22 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.

11.Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.

12.The permissible load of a multi-function contact output and an error contact output is 10 mA. Use a multifunction open-collector output for a load less than 10 mA.

13.Do not ground nor connect the AC terminal on the control circuit to the unit. Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.

14.

indicates shield wire and

indicates twisted-pair shield wire.

Terminal Block Configuration

The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3

and Fig 2.4

E (G) FM AC AM

SC A1 A2 A3

S1 S2 S3 S4

P1 P2 PC

+V AC -V

S5 S6 S7

RP R+ R- S+ S-

MB MC

M2 E (G)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 2.3 　 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter with SPEC: C or later for 0.4 kW Shown Above)

Control circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Main circuit terminals

Ground terminal

Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter with SPEC: C or later for 22 kW Shown Above)

-6

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1

to Table 2.3

. Refer to instruction manual

TOBPC72060000 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.

Inverter

Model

CIMR

F7S20P4

Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes

Terminal Symbol

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

(14)

Wire Type

F7S20P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

(14)

F7S21P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

F7S22P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

F7S23P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

F7S25P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

F7S27P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

F7S2011 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5

F7S2015

F7S2018

F7S2022

F7S2030

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

B1, B2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

B1, B2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

1.2 to 1.5

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

3.5 to 5.5

(12 to 10)

5.5

(10)

8 to 14

(8 to 6)

14 to 22

(6 to 4)

30 to 38

(4 to 2)

8 to 14

(8 to 6)

(4)

30 to 38

(3 to 2)

8 to 14

(8 to 6)

(4)

30 to 60

(3 to 1)

8 to 22

(8 to 4)

22 to 38

(4 to 2)

50 to 60

(1 to 1/0)

8 to 22

(8 to 4)

22 to 38

(4 to 2)

3.5

(12)

5.5

(10)

(14)

(8)

(6)

(4)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(4)

(3)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Inverter

Model

CIMR

F7S2037

F7S2045

F7S2055

F7S2075

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/ 1, / 2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/ 1, / 2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/ 1, / 2

, 1

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11,

S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/ 1, / 2

Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)

Terminal Symbol

Terminal

Screws

M10

M12

M10

M12

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

60 to 100

(2/0 to 4/0)

5.5 to 22

(10 to 4)

30 to 60

(2 to 2/0)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

80 to 100

(3/0 to 4/0)

5.5 to 22

(10 to 4)

38 to 60

(1 to 2/0)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

50 to 100

(1/0 to 4/0)

100

(4/0)

5.5 to 60

(10 to 2/0)

30 to 60

(3 to 4/0)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

80 to 125

(3/0 to 250)

80 to 100

(3/0 to 4/0)

5.5 to 60

(10 to 2/0)

100 to 200

(3/0 to 400)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

(2/0)

Wire Type

(2)

1.25

(16)

(3/0)

(1)

1.25

(16)

50 × 2P

(1/0 × 2P)

100

(4/0)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

(1/0)

1.25

(16)

80 × 2P

(3/0 × 2P)

80 × 2P

(3/0 × 2P)

100

(3/0)

1.25

(16)

* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 ° C

-8

Inverter

Model

CIMR

F7S40P4

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes

Terminal Symbol

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm 2

(AWG)

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

(14)

Wire Type

F7S40P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

F7S41P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

F7S42P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

F7S43P7

F7S45P5

F7S47P5

F7S4011

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

1.2 to 1.5

1.8

2.5

F7S4015

F7S4018

F7S4022

F7S4030

F7S4037

F7S4045

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3

B1, B2

(M6)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/

T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/

T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

2.5

(4.0 to 5.0)

4.0 to 5.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

3.5 to 5.5

(12 to 10)

2 to 5.5

(14 to 10)

5.5(10)

3.5 to 5.5

(12 to 10)

5.5 to 14

(10 to 6)

14 to 22

(6 to 4)

14 to 38

(6 to 2)

(4)

22 to 38

(4 to 2)

22 to 60

(4 to 1/0)

8 to 22

(8 to 4)

22 to 38

(4 to 2)

38 to 60

(2 to 1/0)

8 to 22

(8 to 4)

22 to 38

(4 to 2)

8 to 14

(8 to 6)

5.5 to 14

(10 to 6)

8 to 38

(8 to 2)

(8)

8 to 22

(8 to 4)

(14)

(4)

(2)

5.5

(10)

(8)

5.5

(10)

(8)

(14)

5.5

(10)

3.5

(12)

(8)

3.5

(12)

(14)

3.5

(12)

(4)

(6)

(2)

(4)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Inverter

Model

CIMR

F7S4055

F7S4075

F7S4090

F7S4110

F7S4132

F7S4160

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)

Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

Terminal

Screws

M10

M12

M10

M12

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm 2

(AWG)

(1)

Wire Type

100

(4/0)

1.25

(16)

100 × 2P

(4/0 × 2P)

80 × 2P

(3/0 × 2P)

50 × 2P

(1/0 × 2P)

1.25

(16)

(4)

(2/0)

(1/0)

(1)

1.25

(16)

50 × 2P

(1/0 × 2P)

50 × 2P

(1/0 × 2P)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

(2/0)

1.25

(16)

80 × 2P

(3/0 × 2P)

60 × 2P

(2/0 × 2P)

(2)

1.25

(16)

100

(4/0)

100

(4/0)

50 to 60

(1 to 1/0)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

80 to 100

(3/0 to 4/0)

60 to 100

(2/0 to 4/0)

8 to 60

(8 to 2/0)

100 to 150

(4/0 to 300)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

100 to 200

(4/0 to 400)

80 to 200

(3/0 to 400)

8 to 60

(8 to 2/0)

50 to 150

(1/0 to 300)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

80 to 100

(3/0 to 4/0)

8 to 22

(8 to 4)

50 to 100

(1 to 4/0)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

50 to 100

(1/0 to 4/0)

50 to 100

(1/0 to 4/0)

8 to 60

(8 to 2/0)

60 to 150

(2/0 to 300)

8 to 22

(8 to 4)

22 to 38

(4 to 2)

60 to 100

(2/0 to 4/0)

50 to 100

(1/0 to 4/0)

5.5 to 22

(10 to 4)

38 to 60

(2 to 2/0)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

80 to 100

(3/0 to 4/0)

-10

Inverter

Model

CIMR

F7S4185

F7S4220

F7S4300

, 1

Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/ 1, 200/

200, 400/

400

Terminal

Screws

M16

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

78.4 to 98

1.3 to 1.4

78.4 to 98

78.4to 98

1.3 to 1.4

78.4 to 98

1.3 to 1.4

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

100 to 325

(4/0 to 600)

0.5 to 5.5

(20 to 10)

Recommended

Wire Size mm 2

(AWG)

150 × 2P

(300 × 2P)

125 × 2P

(250 × 2P)

325 × 2P

(600 × 2P)

125 × 2P

(250 × 2P)

1.25

(16)

Wire Type

125 × 2P

(250 × 2P)

1.25

(16)

125 × 4P

(250 × 4P)

125 × 2P

(250 × 2P)

125 × 4P

(4/0 × 4P)

200 × 4P

(400 × 4P)

100 × 2P

(3/0 × 2P)

1.25

(16)

250 × 2P

(500 × 2P)

200 × 2P

(400 × 2P)

125 × 4P

(250 × 4P)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 ° C.

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)

Wire Thickness (mm 2 ) Terminal Screws

M3.5

0.5

Size

1.25 to 3.5

M3.5

1.25 to 4

1.25 to 3.5

0.75

M4 1.25 to 4

1.25

M3.5

1.25 to 3.5

1.25 to 4

2 to 3.5

2 to 4

2 to 5

2 to 6

3.5/5.5

30/38

50/60

M10

100

150

200

325

M10

M12

M12 x 2

M16

2 to 8

5.5 to 4

5.5 to 5

5.5 to 6

5.5 to 8

8 to 5

8 to 6

8 to 8

14 to 6

14 to 8

22 to 6

22 to 8

38 to 8

60 to 8

60 to 10

80 to 10

100 to 10

100 to 12

150 to 12

200 to 12

325 to 12

325 to 16

IMPORTANT

1. Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:

Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10 -3

2. Use a closed-loop connector (made by J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd. or an equivalent) for the main circuit input and output terminals of Inverters of 200V 11 kW or more and those of 400V 22 kW or more.

-12

Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4

. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.

Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)

Purpose Terminal Symbol

Model: CIMR-F7S

200 V Class 400 V Class

20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300

Main circuit power input

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2075 4022 to 4300

Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300

20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300 DC power input 1,

Braking Resistor Unit connection

B1, B2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018

DC reactor connection 1, 2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018

Braking Unit connection 3, 2022 to 2075 4022 to 4300

Ground 20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300

Note The 1 and input terminals for the DC power do not conform to UL/cUL standards.

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Main Circuit Configurations

The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5

Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations

200 V Class

CIMR-F7S20P4 to 2018

B1 B2

400 V Class

CIMR-F7S40P4 to 4018

B1 B2

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Power supply

Control circuits

Cooling fan is provided for

Inverters of 3.7 kW or more.

CIMR-F7S2022, 2030

㧗㧟

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Power supply

Control circuits

Cooling fan is provided for

Inverters of 2.2 kW or more.

CIMR-F7S4022 to 4055

㧗㧟

㧗㧝

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Power supply

Control circuits

Power supply

Control circuits

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

㧗㧝

CIMR-F7S2037 to 2075

㧗㧟 a b a b

Power supply

Control circuits

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.

* These terminals are wired before shipment.

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

200/

200

400/

400

㧗㧝

CIMR-F7S4075 to 4300

㧗㧟 a b

400/200 a b

Power supply

Control circuits

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

-14

Standard Connection Diagrams

Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5.

The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.

CIMR-F7S20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018

DC reactor

(optional)

3-phase 200

VAC (400 VAC)

㧗㧝㧗 2 B1 B2

R/L1 U/T1

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

W/T3

Braking Resistor

Unit (optional)

CIMR-F7S2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055

3-phase 200

VAC (200 VAC)

㧗㧝

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

㧗 3 -

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Braking Resistor

Unit (optional)

Braking Unit

(optional)

Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.

The DC reactor is built in.

IMPORTANT

When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR), connect the B1 terminal of the

Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − terminal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the

Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.

CIMR-F7S2037 to 2075

3-phase

200 VAC

㧗㧝㧗 3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

S1/L21

T1/L31 r/

Braking Resistor

Unit (optional)

Braking Unit

(optional)

CIMR-F7S4075 to 4300

3-phase

400 VAC

㧗㧝

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31 r/

200/

400/

㧗 3

200

400

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Braking Resistor

Unit (optional)

Braking Unit

(optional)

Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.

IMPORTANT

If a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor Unit is connected to a wrong terminal, the Inverter, Braking Unit, or

Braking Resistor Unit can be damaged.

Refer to FOR VARISPEED-600 SERIES INVERTER BRAKING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT

INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC720600000) for connecting the Inverter with a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor

Unit.

Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Wiring the Main Circuits

This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.

Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for wiring the main circuit power supply inputs.

Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker

Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker

(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.

• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.

•

For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at

120% of the rated output current).

If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.6

Inverter

20P4 to 2030: 3-phase,

200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

2037 to 2075: 3-phase,

200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz

40P4 to 4300: 3-phase,

380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Power supply

Fault output

(NC)

* For 400 V Class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.

Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation

Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. At the Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter for Inverters with a countermeasure against high frequency to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and to ignore high-frequency leakage current. Use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.

Using a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure against high frequency may result in a malfunction caused by high-frequency leakage current. If a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure malfunctions, replace it with a ground fault interrupter with a countermeasure against high frequency or reduce the carrier frequency of the Inverter. Alternatively, use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at least 200 mA per Inverter.

-16

Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.

When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.

• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.

Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.

Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.

•

When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.

If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.

Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.

Installing an AC Reactor or DC Reactor

If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.

To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.

This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.

Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side

Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.

• Correct Noise Filter Installation

Power supply

MCCB

Noise filter

MCCB

Inverter

Other controllers

Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.

Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation

Power supply MCCB

Inverter

MCCB

Generalpurpose noise filter

Other controllers

Power supply

MCCB

Generalpurpose noise filter

Inverter M

MCCB

Other controllers

Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No generalpurpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise generated from the Inverter.

Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation

Do not use a Phase Advancing Capacitor

If a phase advancing capacitor or a surge absorber is connected to the input side of the inverter’s main circuit to improve the power factor, harmonics from the inverter may cause overheating or damage the phase advancing capacitor or the surge absorber. Also, the inverter may malfunction because of the overcurrent.

Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.

Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.

Check that the motor rotates forward with the Forward Run Command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the Forward Run Command.

Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.

Installing a Low-voltage Manual Starter

For applications where the overhauling load causes the motor to turn even when the Inverter power is OFF, be sure to connect a low-voltage manual starter on the Inverter’s output side. Be sure to open the low-voltage manual starter when wiring and during maintenance and inspection of the Inverter.

E.g.: AICUT LB Series manufactured by AICHI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.

-18

Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.

Do Not Switch the Magnetic Starter (Contactor) ON/OFF during Operation

Usually, a magnetic starter should not be connected between the Inverter and the motor. If a magnetic starter must be installed between the Inverter and the motor, never switch ON (close) or OFF (open) during operation, except during an emergency. Confirm that an inverter baseblock has occurred before turning the magnetic starter ON (close) or OFF (open). If the magnetic starter is turned ON (close) or OFF (open) while the

Inverter is running and not during a baseblock, an Inverter fault may occur. For example, a large inrush current could flow and activate the Inverter overcurrent protection.

Note The condition of the Inverter baseblock can be checked with the baseblock signal of the multi-function contact output. For details, refer to the User

Constant Tables in Chapter 5.

Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side

Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.

Power supply

MCCB

Inverter

Noise filter

Radio noise

Inductive noise

AM radio

Signal line

Controller

Inductive Noise:

Radio Noise:

Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.

Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise.

Fig 2.9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side

Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise

As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.

Power supply

MCCB

Inverter

Metal pipe

30 cm min.

Signal line

Controller

Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Countermeasures Against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.

The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.

Steel box

Power supply

MCCB

Noise filter

Inverter

Noise filter

Metal pipe

Fig 2.11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference

Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices or motor operations. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6

. (For details, refer to

Chapter 5 User Constants .)

Cable length

Carrier frequency

Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

50 m max.

12 kHz max.

100 m max.

8 kHz max.

More than 100 m

4 kHz max.

Note With open-loop vector control for PM (A1-02 = 7), the maximum length of the cable between the Inverter and the motor is 100 m, and the maximum carrier frequency is 4 kHz. If not, the performance of the motor might be abnormal.

Ground Wiring

Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.

•

Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω .

Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.

•

Always minimize the length of the ground wire.

Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.

When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring

-20

Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)

A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.

Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.13

L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)

L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection)

Table 2.7

1 (Enables overheat protection)

0 (Disables overvoltage inhibit selection)

Inverter

Braking resistor

Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor

IMPORTANT

The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.

Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)

Use the following settings if using a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit.

A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 3.7

kW.

Table 2.8

L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 0 (Disables overheat protection)

L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection) 0 (Disables overvoltage inhibit selection)

L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to

Inverter) is connected.

When using the braking resister unit, set L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection) to 0 (Disabled). If L3-11 is not set to 0, the inverter might not stop within the set deceleration time.

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.14

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output

LKEB Braking

Resistor Unit

Inverter

Thermal overload relay trip contact

IMPORTANT

When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR), connect the B1 terminal of the

Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − terminal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the

Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output

CDBR Braking

Unit

LKEB Braking

Resistor Unit

Inverter

Thermal protector trip contact

Thermal overload relay trip contact

Fig 2.14 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit

Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in Fig 2.15

There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).

-22

Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)

Braking

Resistor

Unit

Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)

Braking

Resistor

Unit

Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)

Braking

Resistor

Unit

Inverter

Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3

Braking Unit #1

Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostat contacts)

Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostatic contacts)

Fig 2.15 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

Breaking Unit Application Precautions

When using a Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor and turn

OFF the power supply to the Inverter.

MCCB

Three-phase power:

200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz or

380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit

Inverter

MC MA

Fault contacts

* Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power 400 V Inverter.

Fig 2.16 Power Shutoff Sequence

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.

When setting speeds from an external speed setter (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.

Shield terminal

E(G)

2k Ω

V Speed setting power supply +15 V 20 mA

A1 Master speed reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)

A2 Master speed reference 4 to 20 A

(0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V)

2k Ω

P P

A3 Auxiliary reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)

RP Pulse train input 32 kHz max.

AC Analog common

-V Speed setting power supply -15 V 20 mA

Fig 2.17

Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9

Terminals

FM, AC, AM, P1, P2, PC,

SC, A1, A2,

, +V, -V ,

S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7,

, MA, MB, MC, M1,

Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N ⋅ m)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

Wire Type

M3.5

0.8 to 1.0

0.5 to 2

(20 to 14)

0.75

(18)

MP, RP, R+, R-, S+, S-,

E (G)

Phoenix type

M3.5

0.5 to 0.6

0.8 to 1.0

Single wire

(26 to 14)

0.5 to 2

(20 to 14)

0.14 to 2.5

Stranded wire:

0.14 to 1.5

0.75

(18)

1.25

(12)

• Shielded, twisted-pair wire

• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable

(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical

Wire or equivalent)

* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external speed reference.

* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.

* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.

-24

Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines

Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

0.25 (24)

0.5 (20)

0.75 (18)

1.25 (16)

2 (14)

Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

Model

AI 0.25 - 8YE

AI 0.5 - 8WH

AI 0.75 - 8GY

AI 1.5 - 8BK

AI 2.5 - 8BU d1

0.8

1.1

1.3

1.8

2.3

2.5

2.8

3.4

4.2

12.5

Manufacturer

Phoenix Contact d1 d2

Fig 2.18 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

Wiring Method

Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.

1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.

2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.

3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.

Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver

Control circuit terminal block

Strip the end for

7 mm if no solderless terminal is used.

Wires

Solderless terminal or wire without soldering

3.5 mm max.

Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.

Fig 2.19 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11

. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes.

Type

Sequence input signals

Analog input signals

Photocoupler outputs

Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals

No.

Signal Name Function

S1 Forward Run/Stop Command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.

S2 Reverse Run/Stop Command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.

S3 Multi-function input 1

S4 Multi-function input 2

Factory setting: External fault when ON.

Factory setting: Fault reset when ON.

Multi-function input 3

Multi-function input 4

Multi-function input 5

Signal Level

Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 1 effective when ON.

Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 2 effective when ON.

Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when

ON.

24 VDC, 8 mA

Photocoupler isolation

S8 Multi-function input 6

SC Sequence input common

Factory setting: Not used (H1-06 = F).

-V

+15 V power output

-15 V power output

+15 V power supply for analog references

-15 V power supply for analog references

+15 V

(Max. current: 20 mA)

-15 V

(Max. current: 20 mA)

Master speed frequency reference

Multi-function analog input

-10 to +10 V/-100 to 100%

0 to +10 V/100%

4 to 20 mA/100%,

+100%

-10 to +10 V/-100 to

, 0 to +10 V/100%

Factory setting: Added to terminal A1

(H3-09 = 0)

A3 Multi-function analog input

AC Analog reference common

E(G)

Shield wire, optional ground line connection point

-10 to +10 V/-100 to +100%, 0 to +10 V/

100%

Factory setting: Not used (H3-05 = 1F)

0 V

Multi-function PHC output 1

Multi-function PHC output 2

-10 to +10 V , 0 to +10

V (Input impedance:

20 k Ω )

4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 Ω )

-10 to +10 V , 0 to +10

V (Input impedance:

20 k Ω )

-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V

(Input impedance:

20 k Ω )

Factory setting: Zero-speed

Zero-speed level (b2-01) or below when ON.

Factory setting: speed agreement detection

Frequency within 2% of set speed when ON.

50 mA max. at 48 VDC

Photocoupler output common for P1 and P2

-26

Type

Relay outputs

No.

Fault output signal (NC contact)

Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)

Signal Name

Fault output signal (NO contact)

Function

Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC

Fault when OPEN across MB and MC

Relay contact output common

Multi-function contact output

(NO contact)

Factory setting: Operating

Operating when CLOSED across M1 and

M2.

Signal Level

Dry contacts

Contact capacity:

10 mA min., 1 A max. at

250 VAC

10 mA min., 1 A max. at

30 VDC

Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA

Analog monitor outputs

Pulse

I/O

Multi-function analog monitor 1

Multi-function analog monitor 2

AC Analog common

Multi-function pulse input

Multi-function pulse monitor

Factory setting: Motor speed

0 to 10 V/Maximum speed

Factory setting: Current monitor

5 V/Inverter's rated current

Factory setting: Speed reference input

(H6-01 = 0)

Factory setting: Output frequency

(H6-06 = 2)

-10 to +10 VDC ±5%

2 mA max.

0 to 32 kHz (3 k Ω

0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k

)

Ω )

RS-

485/

422

R+

R-

S+

S-

MEMOBUS communications input

MEMOBUS communications output

For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as R- and S-.

Differential input, photocoupler isolation

Differential output, photocoupler isolation

IG Communications shield wire -

* 1. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6, and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.

* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.20

* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.

* 4. Use the photocoupler outputs when the minimum permissible load is 5 VDC or less and 10 mA or less.

Low level voltage

High level voltage

H duty

Pulse frequency

0.0 to 0.8 V

3.5 to 13.2 V

30% to 70%

0 to 32 kHz

Flywheel diode

External power:

48 V max.

Coil

50 mA max.

The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.

Fig 2.20 Flywheel Diode Connection

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1

The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.

CN5

OFF

Terminating resistance

Analog input switch

: Factory settings

Note: Refer to Table 2.12

for S1 functions and to Table

2.13

for CN5 functions.

Fig 2.21 　 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1

The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.

Name

S1-1

S1-2

RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance

Function

Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1

Setting

OFF: No terminating resistance

ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω

Input method for analog input A2

OFF: 0 to 10 V, − 10 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k Ω )

ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω )

-28

Sinking/Sourcing Mode

The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V common) if shunt connector CN5 is used. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.

Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Supply External Power Supply

CN5 CN5

CN5 (NPN set) Factory setting CN5 (EXT set)

Shunt position

IP24V (24 V) External +24 V

IP24V (24 V)

Sinking

Mode S1 S1

S2 S2

Sourcing

Mode

CN5

CN5 (PNP set)

IP24V (24 V)

CN5

External + 24 V

CN5 (EXT set)

IP24V (24 V)

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.22

Inverter

CIMR-F7S2022

External speed references

Multi-function contact input

Defaults

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

Thermal switch contact for Braking Unit

External fault

3 4

Fault reset

Multi-step command 1

(Main speed switching)

Multi-step speed setting 2

Jog speed selection

Not used

+24V 8mA

Pulse train output

0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k Ω )

Default: Output frequency

CN5 (NPN setting)

Pulse train input

2 k

Speed setting adjustment

Speed setter

2 k

0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA P

0 to 10 V P

MEMOBUS communications

RS-485/422

R+

R-

S+

S-

E(G)

+24V

Shield wire connection terminal

Master speed pulse train

0 to 32 kHz (3 k

)

High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input

Speed setting power

+15 V 20 mA

Master speed reference

0 to 10 V (20 k

)

Master speed reference

4 to 20 mA (250

)

[0 to 10 V (20 k

) input]

Multi-function anlog input

0 to 10 V (20 k

)

Factory setting:

Not used

-V (

−

15V 20mA)

Terminating resistance

−

Ammeter adjustment

20 k

Multi-function analog output 2

-10 to 10 V 2 mA

+ Default: Output current

0 to +10 V

−

Ammeter adjustment

20 k

Multi-function analog output 1

-10 to 10 V 2 mA

Default: Motor speed

0 to +10 V

E(G)

MA Error contact output

250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.

30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.

Min. load

5 VDC, 10 mA

Multi-function contact output

250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.

30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.

Default: Running signal

Min. load

5 VDC, 10 mA

Open collector 1

Default: Zero- speed

Open collector 2

Default:

Speed agree signal

Multi-function open-collector outputs

48 VDC, 50 mA

Fig 2.22 Control Circuit Terminal Connections

-30

Control Circuit Wiring Precautions

Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.

• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,

•

Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.

Use shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as shown in Fig 2.23

Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).

Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.

Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals.

Shield sheath Armor

Do not connect here.

Connect to shield sheath terminal at Inverter (terminal E

(G))

Insulate with tape

Fig 2.23 Processing the Ends of Shielded Twisted-pair Cables

Wiring Check

Checks

Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.

•

Is all wiring correct?

Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?

•

Are all screws tight?

Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?

-32

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Option Card Models and Specifications

Up to three option cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one board into each of the three places on the control board (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.24

Table 2.14

lists the type of option cards and their specifications.

Table 2.14 Option Card Specifications

Card

PG Speed Control Card

Speed Reference Cards

DeviceNet Communication

Card

CC-Link Interface Card

L ON W ORKS Communication Card

SI-N1

SI-C

SI-J

Analog Monitor Card

Digital Output Card

AO-08

AO-12

DO-08

DO-02C

Model Specifications

PG-X2

AI-14U

Phase A/B/Z line-driver inputs

Input signal levels

0 to 10 V DC (20 k Ω ), 1 channel

4 to 20 mA (250 Ω ), 1 channel

Input resolution: 14-bit

AI-14B

Input signal levels

0 to 10 V DC (20 k Ω )

4 to 20 mA (250 Ω ), 3 channels

Input resolution: 13-bit with sign bit

DI-08 8-bit digital speed reference setting

DI-16H2 16-bit digital speed reference setting

DeviceNet communications support

CC-Link communications support

L ON W ORKS communications support

8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels

12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels

Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs

2 relay outputs

Mounting Location

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Installation

Before mounting an option card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the

Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the option card.

The side of the front cover of the Inverter for 200/400 V Class 0.4 to 5.5 kW can be cut out as described in Fig

2.25

to make wiring of the option card easy. If the side of the front cover is cut out, the protective structure will be open chassis (IEC IP00).

Refer to documentation provided with the option card for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C, and D.

Preventing C and D option card Connectors from Rising

After installing an option card into slot C or D, insert an option clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The option clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the clip and pulling it out.

Remove the option clip before installing an option card into slot C or D. The option card cannot be installed completely and may not function property if it is installed with the option clip attached.

A option card mounting spacer hole

4CN

A option card connector

2CN

C option card connector

A option card mounting spacer

(Provided with A option card.)

Option clip

(To prevent raising of

C and D option cards)

3CN

D option card connector

C option card mounting spacer

C option card

D option card

D option card mounting spacer

A option card

Fig 2.24 Mounting option cards

A option card mounting spacer

Front Cover

Slit

Fig 2.25 Cutting the Front Cover

Cut out the slits on the front cover with nippers. Be careful to avoid injury.

-34

PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications

The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables.

PG-X2

The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.

Terminal

TA1

No.

Table 2.15 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications

Contents

Power supply for pulse generator

Specifications

12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*

0 VDC (GND for power supply)

5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*

A-phase + input terminal

A-phase - input terminal

B-phase + input terminal

Line driver input (RS-422 level input)

Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz

B-phase - input terminal

Z-phase + input terminal

Z-phase - input terminal

Common terminal 0 VDC (GND for power supply)

A-phase + output terminal

A-phase - output terminal

B-phase + output terminal

B-phase - output terminal

Line driver output (RS-422 level output)

TA2

Z-phase + output terminal

Z-phase - output terminal

TA3

(E)

Control circuit common

Shield connection terminal

* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.

Control circuit GND

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Wiring

Wiring the PG-X2

Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.

Three-phase

200 VAC

(400 VAC)

Inverter

㔚Ḯ +12 V

㔚Ḯ 0 V

A-phase pulse input (+)

A-phase pulse input (-)

B-phase pulse input (+)

B-phase pulse input (-)

Z ⋧ࡄ࡞ࠬ౉ജ +

Z ⋧ࡄ࡞ࠬ౉ജ (-)

A-phase pulse monitor output

B-phase pulse monitor output

Z-phase pulse monitor output

• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).

Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.

• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.

• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for motor forward rotation, B-phase advancement.

Fig 2.26 PG-X2 Wiring

-36

Wiring Terminal Blocks

Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power lines.

Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.

Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)

Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.16

Terminal

Pulse generator power supply

Pulse input terminal

Pulse monitor output terminal

Shield connection terminal

Terminal

Screws

M3.5

Table 2.16 Wire Sizes

Wire Thickness (mm

0.5 to 2

Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25

Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25

) Wire Type

• Shielded, twisted-pair wire

• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable

(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or equivalent)

Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals

We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.

Refer to Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.

Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque

The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.17

Wire Thickness [mm

]

Table 2.17 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques

Terminal

Screws

Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N • m)

0.5

1.25 - 3.5

0.75

1.25

M3.5

1.25 - 3.5

2 - 3.5

0.8

Wiring Method and Precautions

The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-24. Observe the following precautions when wiring.

• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Board from main circuit lines and power lines.

•

Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long. Refer to Fig 2.23

for details on connecting the shield.

Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).

Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.

When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.

Digital Operator and Modes

This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.

Digital Operator............................................................3-2

Modes ..........................................................................3-5

Digital Operator

This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.

Digital Operator Display

The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.

Drive Mode Indicators (LED)

FWD: Lit when there is a Forward Run Command input.

REV: Lit when there is a Reverse Run Command input.

SEQ: Lit when the Run Command from the control circuit terminal is enabled.

REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.

ALARM: Lit when error activated.

Blinks when alarm activated.

Data Display

Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and settings.

Mode Display

DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.

QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.

ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.

VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.

A. TUNE:Lit in Autotuning Mode.

Keys

Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.

-2

Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions

Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1

Key Name

LOCAL/REMOTE Key

Table 3.1 Key Functions

Function

Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).

This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.

MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).

ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.

Digital Operator

Key

JOG Key

Name

Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)

Function

Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the

Digital Operator.

FWD/REV Key

Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator.

Shift/RESET Key

Increment Key

Decrement Key

DATA/ENTER Key

Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.

Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.

Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set values.

Used to move to the next item or data.

Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set values.

Used to move to the previous item or data.

Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.

Also used to switch from one screen to another.

Constants cannot be changed when Undervoltage (UV) is detected.

RUN Key

Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator.

STOP Key

Stops Inverter operation.

This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.

Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.

There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status.

The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is shown in the Fig 3.2

Inverter output frequency

RUN

STOP

Frequency setting

RUN

STOP

Lit

STOP

Blinking Not lit

Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators

-4

The following table shows the relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the

Inverter conditions.

The indicators are lit, unlit or blinking reflecting the order of priority.

Priority

Table 3.2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators

RUN

Indicator

STOP

Indicator

Inverter

Status

Stopped

Conditions

Stopped*

Stopped

Power supply is shut down.

Emergency stop

• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when the control circuit terminals were used to operate the Inverter.

• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.

Switched from LOCAL (operation using the Digital Operator) to

REMOTE (operation using the control circuit terminals) when the Run

Command is sent from the external terminal.

Switched from the Quick or Advanced Quick programming mode to the

Drive mode when the Run Command is sent from the external terminal.

The Inverter is run at a speed below the minimum speed.

The Run Command is carried out when the External Baseblock Command using the multi-function contact input terminal is issued.

4 Stopped Stopped

5 Running

Running

During deceleration to a stop

During emergency deceleration

• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when operating the

Inverter using the control circuit terminals.

• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.

Run Command is issued.

Note : Lit : Blinking : Not lit

* If planning to run the Inverter again, first turn OFF the Run Command and Emergency Stop Command from the control circuit terminal and send the Run

Command.

Modes

This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.

Inverter Modes

The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.

The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.3

Drive mode

Quick programming mode

Advanced programming mode

Verify mode

Mode

Autotuning mode

Table 3.3 Modes

Primary function(s)

The Inverter can be run in this mode.

Use this mode when monitoring values such as speed references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.

Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the

Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).

Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.

Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.

Use this mode to measure the motor line-to-line resistance while the motor is stopped.

-6

Switching Modes

The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.

Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.

Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display.

MENU Power ON

Drive Mode DATA

ENTER

(Operation possible)

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Quick

Programming Mode

DATA

ENTER

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

DATA

ENTER

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Advanced

Programming Mode

DATA

ENTER

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

ESC ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Verify Mode DATA

ENTER

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Autotuning

Mode

ESC

DATA

ENTER

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

If a user constant is changed the number will be dislayed.

DATA

ENTER

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

When returning from a setting display, the rightmost digit of the monitor display will flash.

DATA

ENTER

ESC

DATA

ENTER

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Mode Selection Displays Monitor Displays

㧦 Lit ޓޓޓ㧦 Flashing ޓޓޓ㧦 Not lit

Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions

Setting Displays

IMPORTANT

When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to enter the drive mode (DRIVE indicator will flash) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the monitor display (DRIVE indicator will light). Run Commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the drive mode will appear when the power is turned ON.)

Modes

Drive Mode

Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in drive mode: The speed reference, motor speed, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault information and the fault history.

When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the speed can be changed from the speed setting display. Use the

Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the speed. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.

Example Operations

Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.

Mode Se l ect i on D i sp l ay

M EN U

Mon i tor Constant D i sp l ay

Power O N

Deta il ed Mon i tor Constant

D i sp l ay

Mon i tor D i sp l ay

Dr i ve Mode

DA T A

ENTE R speed reference

E SC

DA T A

ENTE R

Speed reference sett i ng / d i sp l ay un i t o1 03 *

E SC

DR I V E QU I C K ADV V E R IFY A .T

U NE

E SC

Motor speed

Output current

Mon i tor sett i ng for o1 01

* T he a l phabet i ca l character shown on the far l eft of the mon i tor d i sp l ay i nd i cates the sett i ng of o1 03 ( F requency un i ts of reference sett i ng and mon i tor) .

: H z (o1 03 = 0)

: % (o1 03 = 1)

: m i n

(o1 03 = 2 to 39) ޓ

: User des i red d i sp l ay (o1 03 = 4 0 to

3999)

E SC

Status Mon i tor

㧪

R E S ET

E SC

Speed reference

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

F an operat i ng t i me

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

E rror T race

DA T A

ENTE R

㧪

R E S ET

Current error

E SC

Operat i ng t i me at error DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

F au l t Hi story

㧪

R E S ET

1st prev i ous error

E SC

Operat i ng t i me at 4 th prev i ous error

E SC

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

DR I V E QU I C K ADV V E R IFY A .T

U NE DR I V E QU I C K ADV V E R IFY A .T

U NE

Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode

IMPORTANT

The display for the first monitor constant (speed reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).

Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.

-8

Quick Programming Mode

In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.

Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the

DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.

Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.

Example Operations

Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.

Monitor Display Setting Display Mode Selection Display

Quick Programming Mode

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE

DATA

ENTER

Control method selection DATA

ENTER

ESC

Reference selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Operation method selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Stopping method selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

C1-01: Acceleration time 1

C1-02: Deceleration time 1

C6-01: CT/VT selection d1-01: Speed reference 1 d1-02: Speed reference 2 d1-03: Speed reference 3 d1-04: Speed reference 4 d1-17: Jog speed reference

ESC

AO CH2 output gain

ESC

AO CH1 output gain

DATA

ENTER

ESC

DATA

ENTER

ESC

E1-01: Input voltage setting

E1-04: Max. speed

E1-05: Max. voltage

E1-09: Min. speed

E1-13: Base voltage

E5-01: Motor capacity selection

E5-02: Motor rated capacity

E5-03: Motor rated current

E5-04: Number of motor poles

E5-05: Motor armature resistance

E5-06: Motor d-axis inductance

E5-07: Motor q-axis inductance

E5-09: Motor generated voltage

constant

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode

Modes

Advanced Programming Mode

In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.

DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.

Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.

Example Operations

Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.

Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display Mode Selection Display

DATA

ENTER

Advanced Programming Mode

Setup settings: ޓ A1-xx

㧪

RESET

Access level DATA

ENTER

DRIVE QUICK ADV

VERIFY A.TUNE

ESC

Control mode selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Initialize

DATA

ENTER

ESC

PID control: ޓ b5-xx

㧪

RESET

PID control mode selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Proportional gain DATA

ENTER

ESC

PID feedback command loss detection time

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Torque limits: L7-xx

㧪

RESET

Forward torque limit

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Reverse torque limit

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Reverse regenerative torque limit DATA

ENTER

ESC

Copy functions: ޓ o3-xx

㧪

RESET

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Copy function selection DATA

ENTER

ESC

Read permitted selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode

-10

Setting User Constants

Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.

Step

No.

Table 3.4 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode

Digital Operator Display Description

1 Power supply turned ON.

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

2 MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).

DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting display. The setting of C1-01 (10.0) is displayed.

Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right.

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Increment Key pressed to change set value to

20.0 s.

DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data. “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.

The monitor display for C1-01 returns.

Modes

Verify Mode

Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.

Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.

Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.

Example Operations

An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), and E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting).

Mode Selection Display

Monitor Display Setting Display

Verify Mode

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

DATA

ENTER

Speed reference selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Speed reference selection

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Acceleration time 1

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Acceleration time 1

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Input voltage setting DATA

ENTER

ESC

Input voltage setting

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE

Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode

DATA

ENTER

-12

Autotuning Mode

For examples of autotuning operation, refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation .

Trial Operation

This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation.

Overview of Trial Operation Procedure........................4-2

Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3

Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-27

-2

Overview of Trial Operation Procedure

Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic user constants, always set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) according to the application.

Be sure to set E1-01 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input voltage in accordance with the supply voltage being used.

S T AR T

nsta

at

on

W

r

ng

Set power supp

y vo

tage

∗

urn O

power

Conf

rm status

Bas

c sett

ngs

Motor constant sett

ngs

App

cat

o

n sett

ngs

(Advanced programm

ng mode)

o

-l

oad operat

on

oaded operat

on

Opt

mum adjustments and constant sett

ngs

Check

record constants

EN D

∗ Set for 4 00 V C l ass I nverter for 75 kW or more .

Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart

Trial Operation Procedures

The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.

Application Confirmation

First, confirm the application before using the Inverter.

• Fan, blower, pump

• Other equipment

For any Inverter application other than a fan, blower, or pump, set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) to 0 (CT: low carrier, constant torque). The default setting is 1 (VT: high carrier, variable torque).

However, only 1(VT) can be set for 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters with any SPEC.

Note: Inverters with SPEC: B or earlier are used only for applications requiring variable torque.

Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)

Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the power tap nearest to the actual power supply voltage. If the wrong connector is selected, the Inverter may be damaged.

The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure to change the setting.

1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.

2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.

3. Remove the terminal cover.

4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2

5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.

Power tap

200 V Class power supply

400V Class power supply

Power supply input terminals

Jumper (factory-set position)

CHARGE indicator

Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper

-4

Power ON

Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.

1. Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.

200V Class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz

400V Class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz

For an Inverter of 200 V, 37 kW or more, use one of the following power supplies for the cooling fan.

3-phase 200/208/220 VAC 50 Hz or 3-phase 200/208/220/230 VAC 60 Hz

2. Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.

3. Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.

4. Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to turn OFF.

5. When using a PG speed control board, make sure that it is wired correctly.

6. Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system. (No-load condition)

Checking the Display Status

If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:

Display for normal operation

The speed reference ( % ) monitor is displayed in the data display section.

&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'

When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting . The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.

Display for fault operation

The display will differ depending on the type of fault.

A low voltage alarm is shown at left.

Trial Operation Procedures

Basic Settings

Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit) and then set the following user constants. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5 User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user constants.

Constants that must be set are listed in Table 4.1

and those that are set according to the application are listed in

Table 4.2.

Table 4.1 Basic Settings of Constants

Constant

Number

Name Description Setting Range

Factory

Setting

Page

A1-02

Control method selection

Used to select the control method for the

Inverter

0: Sequence test

(This method implements a sequence test with an induction motor connected or any other motor not connected.)

6: Flux vector control for PM

7: Open-loop vector control for PM

This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

0 or 7

0, 6, or 7

7 5-4 b1-01 Reference selection

Set the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option card

4: Pulse train input b1-02

Operation method selection

Set the Run Command input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option card

C1-01 Acceleration time 1

Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from

0 to the maximum speed, in 1-second units.

C1-02 Deceleration time 1

Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0, in 1-second units.

C6-01 CT/VT selection

Set to CT (not low noise, maximum current overload: 150%) or VT (low noise, maximum current overload:120%).

0: CT

1: VT

0 to 3

0 to 4

0 to 3

0.0 to 6000.0 s

0 or 1

10.0 s

5-10

6-5

6-63

6-83

5-10

6-14

6-63

6-83

5-16

6-20

5-16

6-20

5-19

6-2

E1-01

Input voltage setting

Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.

This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.

155 to 255 V

(200 V Class)

310 to 510 V

(400 V Class)

200 V

(200 V

Class)

400 V

(400 V

Class)

5-25

6-25

* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/ deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.

* 2. Only 1(VT) can be set for 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters.

-6

Table 4.2 Constants That Are Set As Required

Constant

Number b1-03

Name

Stopping method selection

Description

Used to set the stopping method used when a

Stop Command is input.

0: Deceleration to stop

1: Coast to stop

3: Coast to stop with timer (Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration.)

Setting Range

0, 1, or 3 d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17

Frequency references 1 to 4 and jog frequency reference

Set the required speed references for multistep speed operation or jogging.

0.00 to

100.00%

H4-02 and

H4-05

FM and AM terminal output gain

Set the voltage level gain for the multi-function analog output 1 (H4-02) and 2 (H4-05).

Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100% output for the monitor item.

0.00 to 2.50

Factory

Setting

0 d1-01 to d1-04:

0.00 % d1-17:

10.00 %

H4-02:

1.00

H4-05:

0.50

Page

5-10

6-16

5-20

6-9

5-42

IMPORTANT

When C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), non-low noise will apply and the Inverter overload withstand ratio will be

150% of the Inverter rating per minute. When C6-01 is set to 1 (VT), low noise will apply and the Inverter overload withstand ratio will be 120% of the Inverter rating per minute. If C6-01 is set to 1 (VT) when overload withstand capability is required by the application, the life of the Inverter may be reduced.

Trial Operation Procedures

Motor Constant Settings

The procedures for setting motor constants differ in accordance with the following three conditions and the type of motor being used. Follow each step to correctly set the motor constants.

•

When using the Varispeed F7S for the first time.

When replacing the motor or the Inverter.

When replacing the PG.

Use the following flow chart to set the motor constants.

Start

N o

I n i t i a l operat i on ?

Y es

N o

N ew motor or I nverter ?

Y es

Standard I PM motor for f l ux vector contro l

Standard I PM motor for open -l oop vector contro l

Motor type ?

Contro l method se l ect i on (A1 02)*

Set A1 02 to 7

(Open -l oop vector contro l for PM) .

Set A1 02 to 6 ( Fl ux vector contro l for PM) .

N ew PG ?

Y es

N o

Set motor constants. Refer to page 4-8.

Select the rotational direction of motor.

Refer to page 4-11.

Confirm the rotational direction of motor.

Refer to page 4-11.

Adjust zero-point pulse of PG.

Refer to page 4-12.

E nd

* F actory sett i ng : A1 02 = 7 (Open -l oop vector contro l for PM) .

Fig 4.3 Flow Chart for Motor Constant Settings

-8

The following sections describe how to select a control method and how to set the motor constants.

Control Method Selection

Select the control method in accordance with the type of motor being used.

Table 4.3 Control Method Selection

Control Method

Constant

Setting

Applicable Motor

Flux vector control for PM A1-02 = 6

Standard IPM motor for the flux vector control

(Constant torque series: SST4 motors)

Open-loop vector control for

A1-02=7

(Default)

Standard IPM motor for the open-loop vector control

(Variable torque series: SSR1 motors)

* 1. Only for applications of requiring variable torque. Do not use this control method for elevating machines or applications requiring constant torque.

* 2. Cannot be used for the following applications:

•Operations switching commercial power supply and Inverter

•Running more than one motor per Inverter (Multi-motor drive)

Motor Constant Settings

Flux vector control for PM (A1-02 = 6)

1. Motor Constant Settings

Check the nameplate (NP) on the motor being used to obtain the required motor constant settings.

Record those values in the NP Value (Setting) columns of Table 4.4.

8#4+52''&

2*#5'2'4/#0'06/#)0'6/1614

6;2'55621.'5'

2416'%6+10

%11.+0)

4#6+0) # TOKP T

' ' .F

2#4#/'6'4

+05 %11.#066'/2 ͠ #.6+67&' O

-G

Ǎǰ '

56&

$4)01

DRIVE

END

OPP

END

/#55 MI Ǎǰ ’

5'401 ;'#4

;#5-#9#'.'%64+%%14214#6+10

,#2#0

-K

-V

Fig 4.4 Example of the Nameplate on a Standard Yaskawa IPM Motor for the Flux Vector Control

Set the Inverter to the values that were recorded in Table 4.4 starting from the top. After making the settings, confirm that the settings for the motor constants are correct.

Note: If the setting of E5-01 (Motor capacity selection) is changed, the other motor constants being set will return to the factory settings. If so, reset the

Inverter to the required settings recorded in Table 4.3 starting from the top.

Trial Operation Procedures

Constant

No.

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

E1-13

E5-02

E5-03

Constant Name

Motor Capacity

Selection

Max. Speed

Motor base voltage

Motor rated capacity

Motor rated current

E5-04

E5-05

E5-06

E5-07

E5-09

E5-11

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance

Motor d-axis inductance

Motor q-axis inductance

Motor generated voltage constant

PG home position offset

(POLES)

(

(r1)

(Ld)

(Lq)

(Ke)

Δθ )

* 1. Table 4.5 shows the settings of E5-01 (motor capacity selection).

* 2. Table 4.6 shows the allowable range of the fixed output.

Table 4.4 Motor Constant Settings

Mark on

Motor NP

Remakes

−

If using a 1750 min

-1

motor, setting is not required.

If using a 1450 min

-1

or an

1150 min

-1

motor, setting is required.

(r/min) or

(min

-1

)

Set to a value within the allowable range of the fixed output

The setting of E1-04 will be the standard value for the 100% speed reference.

(r/min) or

(min

-1

)

−

(V)

(KW)

(A)

If two constants are shown for the voltage (V), use the one in the lower row.

−

If two constants are shown for the amperes (A), use the one in the lower row.

Setting is usually not required.

(6: Fixed value)

−

NP Value

(Setting)

Confirmed

-10

11.00

15.00

18.50

22.00

30.00

37.00

45.00

55.00

Motor capacity

(kW)

0.4

0.75

1.50

2.20

3.70

5.50

7.50

75.00

90.00

110.00

132.00

160.00

200.00

250.00

300.00

1750 min

-1

• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 75 kW)

• 1:1.3 (90 kW to 160 kW)

• 1:1.2 (200 kW to 300 kW)

Table 4.5 Settings for E5-01 (Motor Capacity Selection)

400 V

1750 min

-1

02C

02D

02E

02F

028

029

02A

02B

020

021

022

023

024

026

027

034

035

036

037

030

031

032

033

200 V

1750 min

-1

00B

00C

00D

00E

007

008

009

00A

000

001

002

003

004

005

006

00F

200 V

1450 min

10B

10C

10D

10E

107

108

109

10A

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

10F

-1

400 V

1450 min

-1

200 V

1150 min

-1

20B

20C

20D

20E

207

208

209

20A

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

20F

12C

12D

12E

12F

128

129

12A

12B

120

121

122

123

124

126

127

134

135

136

130

131

132

133

Table 4.6 Allowable Range of Fixed Output

Base Speed (E1-06)

1450 min

-1

• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 55 kW)

• 1:1.3 (75 kW to 160 kW)

• 1:1.2 (200 kW, 250 kW)

1150 min

-1

• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 45 kW)

• 1:1.3 (55 kW to 160 kW)

• 1:1.2 (200 kW)

400 V

1150 min

-1

22C

22D

22E

22F

228

229

22A

22B

220

221

222

223

224

226

227

234

235

230

231

232

233

E.g.: When using a motor with a base speed (E1-06) of 1750 min -1 and a capacity of 0.4 kW within a fixed

output range of 1: 1.5, use the following equation to calculate the setting of E1-04 (Max. motor speed):

E1-04=E1-06 × 1.5.

Trial Operation Procedures

2. Selection of the Rotational Direction of Motor

Select the direction of the motor rotation in F1-05 (PG rotation).

The factory setting of F1-05 is 1 (phase B leads with forward run command).

A forward run is when the motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW) as viewed from the load side. If using a forward run in which the motor rotates clockwise (CW) as viewed from the load side, use the following procedures.

Step1. Rewire the cables between the motor and the Inverter.

Switch the cables to any two of the U, V, or W output terminals.

For example, if the terminals are connected in the order of U, V, and W, then switch the cables of terminal V and W and reconnect them in the order of U, W, and V.

Step2. Change the settings of Inverter constants.

• PG rotation (F1-05)

Change the setting from 1 [phase B leads with forward run command

•

(CCW)]to 0 [phase A leads with forward run command (CW)].

PG home position offset (E5-11)

Multiple the preset value by negative one and set E5-11 to the resulting value.

For example, if the PG home position offset has already been done, then multiply the value set automatically as PG home position by negative one and set E5-11 to the resulting value.

3. Confirmation of the Rotational Direction of Motor

Follow the procedure outlined in Table 4.7 to view the detected motor speed, and check the following two points.

•

When manually rotating the motor shaft, check if the actual rotational direction is in accordance with the displayed polarity .

Check if the displayed motor speed is correct.

IMPORTANT

• After confirming that the STOP LED of the Digital Operator is lit, check the rotational direction of the motor.

• Be careful not to get anything caught in the shaft or coupling.

• When manually rotating the coupling, be careful not to hurt yourself with the key slot.

Forward run

Load side

Fig 4.5 Rotational Direction of the Motor

-12

No.

Table 4.7 Confirmation of the Rotational Direction of Motor

Procedure

Example of

Digital Operator Display

Turn on the power and change the display to the motor speed (U1-05).

U1-05 = 0.00% −

If the direction of the forward run is counterclockwise (CCW), rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise as viewed from the load side.

If the direction of the forward run is clockwise (CW), rotate the motor shaft clockwise as viewed from the load side.

U1-05 will change from 0.00 % to

3.00%.

Check if the displayed motor speed is a positive value for a forward run and if it is as appropriate as the rotating speed.

Confirmation

If the direction of the forward run is counterclockwise (CCW), rotate the motor shaft clockwise as viewed from the load side.

U1-05 will change from 0.00% to -

3.00%.

W If the direction of the forward run is clockwise (CW), rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise as viewed from the load side.

Check if the displayed motor speed is a negative value for a reverse run and if it is as appropriate as the rotating speed.

If an error was found when checking the motor rotation, correct the problem by carrying out the recommended course of action listed.

Error

Shows motor speed for opposite polarity.

Action

Change the setting for PG rotation (F1-05).

Shows incorrect motor speed or zero.

Check the PG wiring.

Refer to Wiring the PG-X2 in Chapter 2.

4. Compensation of the Zero-point Pulse of PG

Use autotuning to compensate for the zero-point pulse of a PG.

[Precautions before Autotuning]

Check the following precautions before starting autotuning.

• Autotuning of the Inverter is fundamentally different from that of the servo system. Inverter autotuning automatically adjusts the constants according to the values of the detected motor constants, whereas servosystem autotuning adjusts the constants according to the detected size of the load.

•

If autotuning is done with the motor connected to the load, the motor constants that are obtained will be incorrect and the motor may operate in an unusual manner. Be sure to separate the motor from the load before starting autotuning.

During autotuning, the required data will be measured while the motor is running, so, make sure that the motor is ready to run before starting autotuning. If a switch is installed between the motor and the Inverter, be sure to shut off the switch before autotuning.

Multi-function analog input terminals do not work during autotuning. Also, multi-function analog output terminals maintain their status that existed before autotuning was started.

Trial Operation Procedures

[Operation Procedure for Autotuning]

1. In autotuning mode, set the constant for autotuning mode selection (T1-01) to 4 (PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning).

2. Refer to the nameplate of the motor for setting the following constants in the order in which they are displayed on the digital operator: motor rated capacity, base speed, base voltage, motor rated current, number of motor poles, motor d-axis inductance, motor q-axis inductance, and motor induced voltage.

3. Set T2-11 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input current in accordance with the power supply voltage being used.

4. After setting all of the constants, press the RUN key. Automatic measurements used to calculate the compensation value of the zero-point pulse using a PG and the value of the motor armature resistance will start.

F orward run at l ow speed (30 r / m i n) F orward run at l ow speed (30 r / m i n)

Power : O N Start of autotun i ng

Preparat i on before autotun i ng

E nd of autotun i ng

Process i ng after autotun i ng

Fig 4.6 Pattern of Operation for Zero-point Pulse Compensation using a PG

-14

[Constant Settings for Autotuning]

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Set the autotuning mode.

2: Stationary autotuning for lineto-line resistance only

4: PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning

(This selection is only for vector controls with a PG for PM)

2, 4

No No Yes Yes 701H

T2-01

Motor rated capacity

(E5-02 correspondence)

Sets the motor rated capacity according to the information on the motor name plate.

Only the same or one level less of

Inverter capacity can be set.

0.40 to

160.00

0.40 to

300.00

0.40

T2-02

Base speed

(E1-06 correspondence)

T2-03

T2-04

Base voltage

(E1-13 correspondence)

Motor rated current

(E5-03 correspondence)

Sets the motor base speed according to the information on the motor name plate.

Only the value of 1750,1450,1150 min

-1

can be set.

Sets the motor base voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor rated current according to the information on the motor name plate.

1150 to

1750

0.0 to

255.0

0.00 to

2000.0

1750 min

-1

190.0

*3, *4

1.65

T2-05

Number of motor poles

(E5-04 correspondence)

Sets the number of motor poles according to the information on the motor name plate.

Usually setting is not required.

(6: Fixed value)

6 pole

T2-06

T2-07

T2-08

T2-11

Motor d axis inductance

(E5-06 correspondence)

Motor q axis inductance

(E5-07 correspondence)

Motor generation voltage constant

(E5-09 correspondence)

Input voltage setting

(E1-01 correspondence)

Sets the motor d axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor q axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor generation voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 V.

0.00 to

300.00

0.00 to

600.00

50.0 to

2000.0

223.0

mV x sec/rad

155 to

255

54.84

64.10

200 V

No Yes Yes 730H

Yes

731H

732H

733H

734H

735H

736H

737H

73AH

Trial Operation Procedures

* 1. Usually, setting is not required. For the flux vector control for PM, 4 will automatically become the value of the factory setting.

* 2. Usually, setting is not required. The value used to set the motor constants, as described in 1.Motor Constant Settings in page 4-8, will automatically become the value of the factory setting. Check that the settings are the same as the values shown on the motor nameplate. If not, set the corresponding

T2 constants to the values shown on the motor nameplate.

* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).

(The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors with 1750 min

-1

, open-loop vector control are given.)

* 4. The factory setting and the setting range for 200 V Class Inverters are given. Those for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.

* 5. Usually, setting is not required. The values set before autotuning is started will automatically become the value of the factory settings. Check if the settings were correctly made in accordance with the power supply voltage being used. If not, be sure to set T2-11 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input voltage in accordance with the power supply voltage being used.

[Operation Example for Autotuning]

M EN U

[ Autotun i ng ]

[ Autotun i ng mode

Se l ect i on ]

DA T A

ENTE R

[ Autotun i ng mode ]

(Compensat i on tun i ng of zero po i nt pu l se us i ng a PG and li ne to li ne res i stance autotun i ng)

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

[ Motor ratad capac i ty ] DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

[ Motor ratad capac i ty ]

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

[ Base speed ] DA T A

ENTE R

[ Base speed ]

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

Set T 2 03 to T 2 08 as we ll.

E SC

[I nput vo l tage sett i ng ] DA T A

ENTE R

[I nput vo l tage sett i ng va l ue ]

DA T A

ENTE R

E SC

[ Autotun i ng started ]

RU N

[ Autotun i ng ] [ Stop command i nput ]

[ Autotun i ng comp l eted ]

EN D

Fig 4.7 Example for Autotuning Mode

-16

[Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning]

The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.

Table 4.8 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

Digital Operator Display

Autotuning mode selection: T1-01

Description

Using the same procedures as for the programming modes check and set the T1 constants according to information on the previous page.

Be sure that T1-01 (Autotuning Mode Selection) is set correctly and check safety around the motor and machine.

Input voltage setting: T1-11

&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'

The autotuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-11 have been completed. The

A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.

Autotuning started: TUn14

&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'

Autotuning

&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'

Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display.

The right digit in TUn is the setting of the autotuning mode selection (T1-01).

Stop Command input

If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning, and error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped.

Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-18.

Autotuning completed

END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 minutes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.

Trial Operation Procedures

[Precautions after Autotuning]

• When autotuning is completed

The measured compensation value of zero-point pulse using a PG will be copied to E5-11 (PG home position offset).

The measured armature resistance will be copied to E5-05 (Motor armature resistance).

The setting of T2-01 to T2-11 after autotuning will be reflected to the corresponding constants in Constant

Settings for Autotuning in page 4-14.

•

If the maximum speed and the base speed differ, set E1-04 (Max. motor speed) after completion of autotuning. For the upper setting limit of E1-04, refer to Table 4.6 The Allowable Range of Fixed Output in page 4-10.

When autotuning is halted

If an error occurs during autotuning, autotuning will be halted. Neither the measured value nor the set value will be copied to the constants. The settings will return to be their pre- autotuning values.

Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and take corrective action. After doing so, once again implement PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning.

Open-loop vector control for PM (A1-02 = 7)

Motor constant setting has two patterns. Set the motor constants by either manual setting or autotuning mode setting.

Check the nameplate (NP) of the motor being used for the motor constant values.

Fill those values in the NP Value (Setting) columns of Table 4.9.

8#4+52''&

2*#5'2'4/#0'06/#)0'6/1614

6;2'56421.'5'

2416'%6+10 %11.+0)

M9 8

' '

*\ 4#6+0) # TOKP T

' ' .F

+05 %11.#066'/2 ͠ #.6+67&' O

-G

Ǎǰ

2#4#/'6'4

56&

$4)01

DRIVE

END

OPP

END

/#55 MI Ǎǰ ’

5'401 ;'#4

;#5-#9#'.'%64+%%14214#6+10

,#2#0

-K

-V

Fig 4.8 Example of the Nameplate on a Standard Yaskawa IPM Motor for the Flux Vector Control

1. Manual Setting Procedure

Set the Inverter to the values that were recorded in Table 4.9 starting from the top. After making the settings, confirm that the settings for the motor constants are correct.

Note If the setting of E5-01 (Motor capacity selection) is changed, the other motor constants being set will return to the factory settings. If so, reset the

Inverter to the required settings recorded in Table 4.3 starting from the top.

-18

Constant

No.

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Constant Name

Motor Capacity

Selection

Max. Speed

Motor base voltage

Table 4.9 Motor Constant Settings

Mark on

Motor NP

Remakes

−

If using a 1750 min

-1

motor, setting is not required.

If using a 1450 min

-1

or an

1150 min

-1

motor, setting is required.

(r/min) or

(min

-1

)

Set to a value within the allowable range of the fixed output

The setting of E1-04 will be the standard value for the 100% speed reference.

(r/min) or

(min

-1

)

−

E1-13

E5-02

E5-03

Motor rated capacity

Motor rated current

(V)

(KW)

(A)

E5-04

E5-05

E5-06

E5-07

E5-09

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance

Motor d-axis inductance

Motor q-axis inductance

Motor generated voltage constant

(POLES)

(r1)

(Ld)

(Lq)

(Ke)

* 1. Table 4.10 shows the settings of E5-01 (motor capacity selection).

* 2. Table 4.12 shows the allowable range of the fixed output.

If two constants are shown for the voltage (V), use the one in the lower row.

−

If two constants are shown for the amperes (A), use the one in the lower row.

Setting is usually not required.

(6: Fixed value)

−

NP Value

(Setting)

Confirmed

Trial Operation Procedures

11.00

15.00

18.50

22.00

30.00

37.00

45.00

55.00

Motor capacity

(kW)

0.4

0.75

1.50

2.20

3.70

5.50

7.50

75.00

90.00

110.00

132.00

160.00

1750 min

-1

• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 75 kW)

• 1:1.3 (90 kW to 160 kW)

Table 4.10 Settings for E5-01 (Motor Capacity Selection)

200 V

1750 min

-1

00B

00C

00D

00E

00F

−

007

008

009

00A

000

001

002

003

004

005

006

400 V

1750 min

-1

200 V

1450 min

-1

400 V

1450 min

-1

200 V

1150 min

-1

400 V

1150 min

-1

020

021

022

023

024

026

027

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

120

121

122

123

124

126

127

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

028

029

02A

02B

107

108

109

10A

128

129

12A

12B

207

208

209

20A

02C

02D

10B

10C

02E

02F

10D

10E

12E

12F

030

031

032

−

130

131

132

033

034

−

133

134

Table 4.11 Allowable Range of Fixed Output

Base Speed (1-06)

1450 min

-1

• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 55 kW)

• 1:1.3 (75 kW to 160 kW)

12C

12D

20B

20C

20D

−

1150 min

-1

• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 45 kW)

• 1:1.3 (55 kW to 160 kW)

22C

22D

22E

22F

230

231

232

−

228

229

22A

22B

220

221

222

223

224

226

227

E.g.: When using a motor with a base speed (E1-06) of 1750 min-1 and a capacity of 0.4 kW within a fixed

output range of 1: 1.5, use the following equation to calculate the setting of E1-04 (Max. motor

speed): E1-04=E1-06 × 1.5.

-20

2. Autotuning Mode Setting Procedure

Set the motor constants by autotuning.

[Precautions before Autotuning]

Check the following precautions before starting autotuning.

•

If a switch is installed between the motor and the Inverter, be sure to shut off the switch before autotuning.

Multi-function analog input terminals do not work during autotuning. Also, multi-function analog output terminals maintain their status that existed before autotuning was started.

[Operation Procedure for Autotuning]

1. Set the motor capacity selection (E5-01). If using a 1750 min -1 motor, setting is not required. (Refer to

Table 4.9.)

2. In autotuning mode, set the constant for autotuning mode selection (T1-01) to 2 (Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only).

3. Refer to the nameplate of the motor for setting the following constants in the order in which they are displayed on the digital operator: motor rated capacity, base speed, base voltage, motor rated current, number of motor poles, motor d-axis inductance, motor q-axis inductance, and motor induced voltage.

4. Set T2-11 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input current in accordance with the power supply voltage being used.

5. After setting all of the constants, press the RUN key. Automatic measurements will start to calculate the value of the motor armature resistance.

Trial Operation Procedures

[Constant Settings for Autotuning]

Constant

Number

Name Description

Set the autotuning mode.

2:Stationary autotuning for line-

to-line resistance only

4: PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning

(This selection is only for vector controls with a PG for PM)

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

2, 4

No No Yes Yes 701H

T2-01

Motor rated capacity

(E5-02 correspondence)

Sets the motor rated capacity according to the information on the motor name plate.

Only the same or one level less of inverter capacity can be set.

0.40 to

160.00

0.40 to

300.00

0.40

T2-02

Base speed

(E1-06 correspondence)

T2-03

Base voltage

(E1-13 correspondence)

T2-04

Motor rated current

(E5-03 correspondence)

Sets the motor base speed according to the information on the motor name plate.

Only the value of 1750,1450,1150 min

-1

can be set.

Sets the motor base voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor rated current according to the information on the motor name plate.

T2-05

Number of motor poles

(E5-04 correspondence)

Sets the number of motor poles according to the information on the motor name plate.

Usually setting is not required. (6:

Fixed value)

T2-06

T2-07

T2-08

T2-11

Motor d axis inductance

(E5-06 correspondence)

Motor q axis inductance

(E5-07 correspondence)

Motor generation voltage constant

(E5-09 correspondence)

Input voltage setting

(E1-01 correspondence)

Sets the motor d axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor q axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor generation voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 V.

1150 to

1750

0.0 to

255.0

0.00 to

2000.0

0.00 to

300.00

0.00 to

600.00

155 to

255

1750 min

1.65

6 pole

54.84

64.10

200 V

-1

190.0

*3, *4

50.0 to

2000.0

223.0

mV • sec/rad

No Yes Yes 730H

Yes

731H

732H

733H

734H

735H

736H

737H

73AH

-22

* 1. Usually, setting is not required. For the flux vector control for PM, 4 will automatically become the value of the factory setting.

T2 constants to the values shown on the motor nameplate.

* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).

(The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors with 1750 min

-1

, open-loop vector control are given.)

* 4. The factory setting and the setting range for 200 V Class Inverters are given. Those for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.

[Operation Example for Autotuning]

[Autotuning]

[Autotuning mode

Selection] DATA

ENTER

[Autotuning mode]

(Line-to-line resistance autotuning)

DATA

ENTER

ESC

[Motor ratad capacity]

DATA

ENTER

[Motor ratad capacity]

DATA

ENTER

ESC

[Base speed]

DATA

ENTER

[Base speed]

DATA

ENTER

ESC

Set T2-03 to T2-08 as well.

ESC

[Input voltage setting] DATA

ENTER

[Input voltage setting value]

DATA

ENTER

ESC

[Autotuning started]

RUN

[Autotuning] [Stop command input]

[Autotuning completed]

END

Fig 4.9 Example for Autotuning Mode

Trial Operation Procedures

[Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning]

The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.

Table 4.12 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

Digital Operator Display

Autotuning mode selection: T1-01

Description

Using the same procedures as for the programming modes check and set the T1 constants according to information on the previous page.

Be sure that T1-01 (Autotuning Mode Selection) is set correctly and check safety around the motor and machine.

Input voltage setting: T1-11

&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'

The autotuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-11 have been completed. The

A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.

Autotuning started: TUn12

&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'

Autotuning

&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'

Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display.

The right digit in TUn is the setting of the autotuning mode selection (T1-01).

Stop Command input

If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning, and error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped.

Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-18.

Autotuning completed

END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 minutes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.

-24

[Precautions after Autotuning]

• When autotuning is completed

The measured armature resistance will be copied to E5-05 (Motor armature resistance).

The setting of T2-01 to T2-11 after autotuning will be reflected to the corresponding constants in Constant

Settings for Autotuning in page 4-21.

If the maximum speed and the base speed differ, set E1-04 (Max. motor speed) after completion of autotuning. For the upper setting limit of E1-04, refer to Table 4.11 The Allowable Range of Fixed Output in page 4-19.

• When autotuning is halted

Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and take corrective action. After doing so, once again implement lineto-line resistance autotuning.

Application Settings

User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e., with the ADV indicator lit on the Digital Operator). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode.

Setting Examples

The following are examples of settings for applications.

•

When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor overheating protection.

To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.

To increase the speed of a 1750 min -1 motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 1925 min -1 .

To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 1750 min -1 motor for variable-speed operation between 0 to 1575 min -1 (0% to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.

•

To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.

Change the setting of L3-11 to 0 (Overvoltage inhibit selection disabled) to decrease the speed using a braking unit or braking resister.

To enable use with an increased safety, explosion-proof model in the variable torque series of IPM motors, change the setting of L1-01 to 6 [Increased safety, explosion-proof PM motor (variable torque)].

Trial Operation Procedures

No-load Operation

To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).

Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital

Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.

Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 10.00%) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the

JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in

REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.

INFO

Both a Run Command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must be provided to start Inverter operation. Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of

REMOTE).

If a fault caused by braking characteristics, such as hunting or oscillation, occurs during no-load operation, refer to page

4-27 Adjustment Suggestions and make adjustments.

Loaded Operation

Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the

Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).

Connecting the Load

•

After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.

Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.

Operation using the Digital Operator

•

Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.

If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.

At first, set the speed reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.

Checking Operating Status

•

Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the speed reference.

After changing the speed reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too high.

Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-27 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur.

-26

Check and Recording User Constants

Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit) to check user constants that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.

Any user constants that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.

If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.

The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.

• Recording user constants

•

Setting access levels for user constants

Setting a password

Recording User Constants (o2-03)

If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate memory area in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the user constants can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to

1110.

User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)

A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set to 1 (User-specified Constants) and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the machine or application in a programming mode.

Password (A1-04 and A1-05)

When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will be displayed only when the correct password is input.

Adjustment Suggestions

If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the constants listed in the following table. This table lists only the most commonly used user constants.

Name (Constant

Number)

ASR proportional (P) gain 1 (C5-01)

ASR proportional (P) gain2 (C5-03)

ASR integral (I) time1

(C5-02)(High speeds)

ASR integral (I) time2

(C5-04)(Low speeds)

ASR switching speed

(C5-07)

ASR primary delay time (C5-06)

Motor constants (E1 or

E5)

Table 4.13 User Constants for Adjustment

Function

Factory

Setting

Recommended

Setting

• Increases torque and speed response

• Controls hunting and vibration

• Increases torque and speed response

• Controls hunting and vibration

Adjusts the ASR proportional gain and integral time in accordance with the motor speed.

Controls hunting and vibration

20.00

(A1-02=6)

10.00

(A1-02=7)

0.500 s

0.0 %

0.016 s

(A1-02=6)

0.004 s

(A1-02=7)

−

10.00 to

50.00

5.00 to

30.00

0.300 to

1.000 s

0.0 to max. speed

0.016 to

0.035 s

0.004 to

0.020 s

−

Adjustment Method

• Increase the setting if torque and speed responses are slow. (Increase the setting by increments of 5.)

• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

Note:

Optimal value may differ between no-load operation and loaded operation.

• Reduce the setting if torque and speed responses are slow.

• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

Note:

Optimal value may differ between no-load operation and loaded operation.

If an ASR proportional gain and an integral time cannot be secured at low or high speeds, change the proportional gain and the integral time in accordance with the motor speed.

• Increase the setting if the machine vibrates easily due to low rigidity.

(Increase the setting by increments of 0.01.)

Note:

Optimal value may differ between no-load operation and loaded operation..

Confirm that the settings of the motor constants are correct. Refer to the preceding description of Motor Constant Settings (Table 4.4 or

4.9).

-28

The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system.

Table 4.14 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications

Name (Constant Number)

CT/VT selection (C6-01)

Application

Sets the maximum torque and overload capability to 120% or 150%.

DWELL function (b6-01 to b6-04)

Droop function (b7-01 to b7-02)

Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.

Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can be used when the control method (A1-02) is set to 6.

Acceleration/deceleration times

(C1-01 to C1-11)

S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)

Jump speeds (d3-01 to d3-04)

Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)

Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.

Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.

Used to avoid resonance points during operation.

Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.

Overvoltage inhibit selection (L3-11)

Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)

Used to prevent Inverter DC bus overvoltage. Overvoltage inhibit selection is enabled by default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using a braking unit or a braking resistor to decrease the speed, however, disable overvoltage inhibit selection by setting L3-11 to

Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased, use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter. If a setting is reduced, stalling can occur under heavy loads.

User Constants

This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.

User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3

User Constant Tables ..................................................5-8

-2

User Constant Descriptions

This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.

Description of User Constant Tables

User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Reference Selection) is used as an example.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page b1-01

Reference selection

Set the speed reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal

(analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option card

4: Pulse train input

0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q 180H 6-63

• Constant Number:

• Name:

• Description:

• Setting Range:

• Factory Setting:

• Change during Operation:

• Control Methods:

• MEMOBUS Register:

• Page:

The number of the user constant.

The name of the user constant.

Details on the function or settings of the user constant.

The setting range for the user constant.

The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.

Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)

Refer to page 5-69 for factory settings by control method.

Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the

Inverter is in operation.

Yes: Changes possible during operation.

No: Changes not possible during operation.

Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be monitored or set.

Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode.

A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced programming mode.

No: Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.

The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.

Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.

MENU Drive Mode

Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.

Quick Programming Mode

Minimum constants required for operation can be monitored or set.

Advanced Programming Mode

All constants can be monitored or set.

Verify Mode

Constants changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.

Autotuning Mode

• Open-loop vector control for

PM:

Stationary autotuning only for line-to-line resistance

• Flux vector control for PM:

PG home position offset and line-to line resistance autotuning.

Function

Status Monitor Constants

Fault Trace

Fault History

Initialize Mode

User-specified Setting Mode

Operation Mode Selections

Zero-speed level

Speed Search

Timer Function

PID Control

Dwell Functions

Droop Control

Acceleration/Deceleration

S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration

Speed Control (ASR)

Carrier Frequency

Preset Reference

Reference Limits

Jump Speeds

Reference Speed Hold

Torque Control

V/f Pattern

Motor Setup

PM Motor Constants

PG Option Setup

Analog Reference Board

Digital Reference Board

Analog Monitor Boards

Digital Output Boards

Communications Option Cards

Multi-function Contact Inputs

Multi-function Contact Outputs

Analog Inputs

Multi-function Analog Outputs

MEMOBUS Communications

Pulse Train

Motor Overload

Power Loss Ridethrough

Overvoltage Inhibit Selection

Reference Detection

Fault Restart

Torque Detection

Torque Limits

Hardware Protection

Magnetic Pole Detection

Monitor Select

Multi-function Selections

Copy Function

Motor Autotuning

No.

U3 o1 o2 o3

F4 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5

C6 b5 b6 b7

A2 b1 b2 b3 b4

Page

5-61

5-66

5-68

5-50

5-51

5-52

5-54

5-55

5-56

5-58

5-44

5-45

5-46

5-48

5-49

5-34

5-35

5-36

5-38

5-40

5-42

5-43

5-27

5-28

5-30

5-32

5-33

5-20

5-21

5-22

5-23

5-25

5-13

5-15

5-16

5-17

5-18

5-19

5-8

5-9

5-10

5-12

5-13

5-59

-4

User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode

The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.

Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode.

Constant

Number

Name

A1-02

Control method selection b1-01

Reference selection b1-02

Operation method selection b1-03

Stopping method selection

C1-01

Acceleration time 1

C1-02

Deceleration time 1

C6-01

CT/VT selection

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Used to select the control method for the Inverter

0: Sequence test

(This method implements a sequence test with an induction motor connected or any other motor not connected.)

6: Flux vector control for

7: Open-loop vector control for PM

This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

0 or 7

0, 6, or

Set the speed reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option card

4: Pulse train input

0 to 4

Set the Run Command input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal

(sequence input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option card

0 to 3

Used to set the stopping method used when a Stop Command is input.

0: Deceleration to stop

1: Coast to stop

3: Coast to stop with timer (Run

Commands are disregarded during deceleration.)

Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum speed, in

1-second units.

0, 1, or

Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0, in

1-second units.

0: Low carrier, constant torque (CT)

1: High carrier, variable torque (VT)

0.0 to

6000.0

0 or 1

10.0 s

Yes

102H

180H

181H

182H

200H

201H

223H

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

E1-03

Speed reference 1

Sets the speed reference in the units used in o1-03.

V/f pattern selection

1750 min

-1

*6 *8

Yes d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-17

E1-01

Speed reference 2

Speed reference 3

Speed reference 4

Jog speed reference

Input voltage setting

The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 1 is ON for a multifunction input.

The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 2 is ON for a multifunction input.

The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 2 are ON for multi-function inputs.

The speed reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is

ON.

Set the Inverter input voltage in the unit of 1 V.

This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.

0.00 to

100.00

155 to

255

0.00%

200 V

*6 *7

Yes

10.00% Yes

E1-04 Max. speed

0 to E: Select from the 15 preset patterns.

F: Custom user-set patterns

(Applicable for settings E1-

04 to E1-10.)

This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

Set the maximum motor speed in units of 1 min

-1

*11

The upper limit of maximum motor speed is 1.5 times greater than the values of the base speed of motor (E1-06).

0 to F

1000 to

2700

*12

0.00%

F No

280H

281H

282H

283H

292H

300H

302H

303H

E1-05

Max. voltage

E1-06 Base speed

*11

Set the base speed of motor in units of 1 min

-1

*11

0.0 to

255.0

1000 to

1800

*13

200.0

1750 min

-1

*6 *8

304H

305H

E1-09 Min. speed

Set the minimal speed of the motor in units of 1 min

-1

*11

If A1-02 is set to 7, the lower limit of the motor’s minimal speed is 10% of the base rotation (E1-06).

100 to

1800

*13

0 to

1800

* 13

175 min

-1

*6 *8

*9 *10

No Q Q Q 308H

E1-13

Base voltage

Set the base voltage of the motor in units of 0.1 V.

0.0 to

255.0

* 7

190.0

*6 *7

No No Q Q 30CH

-6

Constant

Number

E2-01

Name

Motor rated current

Description

Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.

E2-11

Motor rated output

Set the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01 kW. This constant is automatically set during autotuning.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

0.32 to

6.40

*15

1.90 A

*14

No Q No No 30EH

0.00 to

650.00

0.40 kW

*16

No Q No No 318H

E5-01

Motor capacity selection

Select the motor capacity.

By setting E5-01, the constants that vary in accordance with the motor capacity will be automatically set.

After making a selection, do not change this setting unless necessary.

If changed, the motor constants will be initialized.

0000 to

0230

0000 to

0235

0000

*17 *18

No No Q Q 329H

E5-02

Motor rated capacity

Set the motor rated capacity in units of 0.01 kW.

The setting is initialized and set to the standard capacity if the selection of the Inverter capacity (o2-04) or that of the motor capacity (E5-01) is changed.

0.40 to

160.00

0.40 to

300.00

0.40

*17 *19

E5-03

Motor rated current

Set the motor rated current in units of 0.01 A for a motor with a capacity of 7.5 kW or less, or in units of 0.1 A for one with a capacity of 11 kW or more.

0.00 to

2000.0

E5-04

E5-05

E5-06

E5-07

E5-09

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance

Motor daxis inductance

Motor qaxis inductance

Motor induced voltage constant

1.65

*17 *19

Set the number of motor poles.

6 pole

*17 *19

Set the resistance per motor phase in units of 0.001 Ω .

After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.

Set the motor d-axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH.

After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.

Set the motor q-axis inductance with the motor rated load in units of 0.01 mH.

Set the peak value of the induced voltage per motor phase in units of

0.1 mV/(rad/s) [electric angle].

Do not change this setting unless necessary.

0.000 to

65.000

0.00 to

300.00

0.00 to

600.00

50.0 to

2000.0

8.233

*17 *19

54.84

*17 *19

64.10

*17 *19

223.0 mV ⋅ sec/rad

*19

32AH

32BH

32CH

32DH

32EH

32FH

331H

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

H4-02

H4-05

Gain (terminal FM)

Gain (terminal AM)

Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.

Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.

The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

A meter calibration function is available.

*20

Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 2.

Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100% output for the monitor items. The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

A meter calibration function is available.

*20

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 to

2.50

1.00

0.50

Yes

41EH

421H

* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depend on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/ deceleration times become 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.

* 2. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. With 400 V Class Inverters of 220 kW or 300 kW, C6-01 cannot be set to 0 (CT).

* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

* 4. A value less than the setting of El-09 (Min. speed) cannot be set for speed references. If you are having trouble setting the speed reference, check the setting of El-09.

* 5. For sequence test (display unit: Hz), the setting ranges change. For open-loop/flux vector control for PM, the upper limits of the setting would be calculated by the following formula: E1-09 × E5-04 ÷ 120.

For sequence test, the upper limits of the setting would be E1-09.

* 6. In open-loop vector control for PM and the vector control with a PG for PM, this constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

* 7. For 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.

* 8. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).

The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ) are given.

* 9. The display units vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop vector control for PM and the vector control with a PG for PM are given. For sequence test, the display unit is Hz.

* 10.The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The setting for open-loop vector control for PM are given. For vector control with a

PG for PM, the setting is 30 min -1 . For sequence test, the setting is 0.0 Hz.

* 11.The settings for the sequence test mode (A1-02=0) are calculated by the following formula.

To set the V/f characteristics in a straight line, assign the same values for E1-07 and E1-09.

If so, the setting of E1-08 is ignored.

Use the following formula to set the four rotations:

E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06(FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

Output voltage (V)

VMAX

(E1-05)

(E1-08)

VMIN

(E1-10) Frequency (Hz)

FMIN

(E1-09)

(E1-07)

(E1-06)

FMAX

(E1-04)

* 12.The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop vector control for PM and for vector control with a PG for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 40.0 to 400.0.

* 13.The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop vector control for PM and for vector control with a PG for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 400.0.

* 14.The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.

* 15.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.

* 16.Initialize E2-11 to set the motor capacity to the same value as that for the Inverter capacity.

* 17.The E5 constants are not initialized by the initialize operation.

* 18.The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the inverter capacity selection (o2-04) or control method selection (A1-02).

0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ).

* 19.The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).

The values for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ) are given.

* 20.To adjust the meter, multiply a value that is equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting and add the set bias.

Adjustment target is the FM terminal when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.

Adjustment target is the AM terminal when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.

-8

User Constant Tables

A: Setup Settings

The following settings are made with the environment constants (A constants): Language displayed on the

Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of constants.

Initialize Mode: A1

User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

A1-00

A1-01

Language selection for

Digital

Operator display

Used to select the language displayed on the Digital

Operator (LED).

0: English

1: Japanese

This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

Constant access level

Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)

0: Monitoring only

(Monitoring and setting the constants for drive mode, A1-01, and A1-

04.)

1: Used to select user constant

(Only constants set in

A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)

2: Advanced

(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming

(A) mode.)

A1-02

Control method selection

0 or 1

0 to 2

Used to select the control method for the Inverter

0: Sequence test

(This method implements a sequence test with an induction motor connected or any other motor not connected.)

6: Flux vector control for

7: Open-loop vector control for PM

This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

0 or 7

0, 6, or

Yes

100H

101H

102H

4-26

6-126

6-127

4-5

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name

A1-03 Initialize

A1-04 Password

A1-05

Password setting

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

Used to initialize the constants using the specified method.

0: No initializing

1110: Initializes using the

User constants

2220: Initializes using a two-wire sequence.

(Initializes to the factory setting.)

3330: Initializes using a three-wire sequence.

Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.

This function write-protects some constants of the initialize mode.

If the password is changed,

A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 constants can no longer be changed. (Programming mode constants can be changed.)

Used to set a four digit number as the password.

This constant is not usually displayed. When the Password (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the RESET Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be displayed.

0 to

3330

0 to

9999

0 to

9999

103H

104H

105H

6-121

4-26

6-127

4-26

6-127

User-set Constants: A2

The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

A2-01 to

A2-32

User setting constants

Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/read.

Maximum 32.

Effective when the Constant

Access Level (A1-01) is set to User Program (1). Constants set in constants A2-01 to A2-32 can be set/read in programming mode.

b1-01 to o3-02

No A A A

106H to

125H

Page

6-128

-10

Application Constants: b

The following settings are made with the application constants (B constants): Operation method selection, zero-speed level, speed searching, timer functions, PID control, dwell functions, and droop control.

Operation Mode Selections: b1

User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page b1-01

Reference selection

Set the speed reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal

(analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option card

4: Pulse train input

0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q 180H

4-5

6-5

6-63

6-83 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-05

Operation method selection

Stopping method selection

Set the Run Command input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal

(sequence input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option card

Used to set the stopping method used when a Stop

Command is input.

0: Deceleration to stop

1: Coast to stop

3: Coast to stop with timer

(Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration.)

0 to 3

0, 1, or

Prohibition of reverse operation

0: Reverse enabled

1: Reverse disabled

Operation selection for setting E1-

09 or less

Used to set the method of operation when the speed reference input is less than the minimum speed (E1-09).

0: Run at speed reference

(E1-09 not effective).

1: STOP (Speeds below E1-

09 in the coast to stop state.)

2: Run at min. speed.

(E1-09)

3: Run at zero-speed

(Speeds below E1-09 are zero)

0 or 1

0 to 3

Q 181H

Q 182H

4-5

6-14

6-63

6-83

4-6

6-16

A 183H 6-49

No 184H 6-16

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page b1-06 b1-07 b1-08

Read sequence input twice

Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs

(forward/reverse and multifunction inputs.)

0: Two scans every 2 ms

(Use for fast responses.)

1: Two scans every 5 ms

(Use for possible malfunction due to noise.)

Operation selection after switching to remote mode

Used to set the operation mode by switching to the

Remote mode using the

Local/Remote Key.

0: Run signals that are input during mode switching are disregarded. (Input

Run signals after switching the mode.)

1: Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the

Remote mode.

Run Command selection in programming modes

Used to set an operation interlock in programming modes.

0: Cannot operate.

1: Can operate (Disabled when Digital Operator is set to select Run Command (when b1-02 = 0)).

2: Cannot operate. (Cannot be in programming mode during operation.)

0 or 1

0 to 2

185H

186H

187H -

-12

Zero-speed level: b2

User constants for zero-speed level are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page b2-01

Zero-speed level (Baseblock starting speed)

Sets the speed in units of

0.1% at which a baseblock will be applied if decelerating to stop.

0.0 to

10.0

1.0%

No No A A 189H 6-16

* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)

Speed Search: b3

User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page b3-01 b3-05

Speed search selection

Enables/disables the speed search function for the Run

Command and sets the speed search method.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

If b3-01 set to 1, the motor speed is calculated at the start of a search, and the motor accelerates or decelerates from this calculated speed to a set speed.

(A motor rotational direction search is also possible.)

Search wait time

Sets the magnetic contactor operating delay time when there is a magnetic contactor on the output side of the

Inverter. When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed by the time set here.

0, 1

0.0 to

20.0

1.0 s

A 191H 6-53

A 195H 6-53

* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed.

User Constant Tables

Timer Function: b4

User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Timer function ONdelay time

Timer function OFFdelay time

Sets the timer function output ON-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.

Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 or H2-

Sets the timer function output OFF-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.

Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 or H2-

0.0 to

300.0

0.0 to

300.0

0.0 s

Page

A 1A3H 6-93

A 1A4H 6-94

PID Control: b5

User constants for PID control are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

PID control method selection

Proportional gain

(P)

Integral (I) time

Integral (I) limit

Derivative

(D) time

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)

2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-controlled.)

3: PID control enabled

(speed reference + PID output, D control of deviation)

4: PID control enabled

(speed reference + PID output, D control of feedback value).

Sets P-control proportional gain as a percentage.

P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.

Sets I-control integral time in 1-second units.

I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.

Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.

Sets D-control derivative time in 1-second units.

D-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.

0 to 4

0.00

25.00

0.0 to

360.0

0.0 to

100.0

0.00 to

10.00

1.00

1.0 s

100.0% Yes

0.00 s

Yes

1A5H

1A6H

1A7H

1A8H

1A9H

Page

6-95

6-96

-14

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

PID output characteristics selection

Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum speed.

PID offset adjustment

Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum speed.

PID primary delay time constant

Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PID-control outputs in 1-second units.

Not usually necessary to set.

Select forward/reverse for

PID output.

0: PID output is forward.

1: PID output is reverse

(highlights the output code)

0.0 to

100.0

-100.0

+100.0

0.00 to

10.00

0 or 1

100.0% Yes

0.0%

0.00 s

Yes

1AAH

1ABH

1ACH

1ADH

Page

6-96

6-96 b5-10

0.0 to

25.0

1.0

No No A A 1AEH 6-96 b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15

PID output gain

Selection of

PID feedback command loss detection

Sets output gain.

PID reverse output selection

0: 0 limit when PID output is negative.

1: Reverses when PID output is negative.

0 limit when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-04.

0: No detection of loss of

PID feedback.

1: Detection of loss of PID feedback.

Operation continues during detection, with the malfunctioning contact not operating.

2: Detection of loss of PID feedback.

Coasts to stop during detection, and fault contact operates.

PID feedback command loss detection level

Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percent units, with the maximum speed at 100%.

PID feedback command loss detection time

PID sleep function operation level

Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s units.

Set the PID sleep function start level as a speed.

(Enabled if PID control is not selected.)

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 to

100

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

100.0

1.0 s

0.0%

1AFH

1B0H

1B1H

1B2H

1B3H

6-96

6-97

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description b5-16 b5-17

PID sleep operation delay time

Set the delay time until the

PID sleep function starts in seconds.

Accel/decel time for PID reference

Set the accel/decel time for

PID reference in seconds.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 s No No A A 1B4H 6-97

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 s No No A A 1B5H 6-97

Dwell Functions: b6

User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page b6-01

Dwell speed at start

0.0 to

100.0

0.0% No b6-02

Dwell time at start

Run Command

Speed

OFF

0.0 to

10.0

0.0 s No b6-03

Dwell speed at stop b6-04

Dwell time at stop b6-01 b6-03 Time b6-02 b6-04

The dwell function is used to keep the speed temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy load.

0.0 to

400.0

0.0% No

0.0 to

100.0

0.0 s No

A 1B6H

4-28

6-24

A 1B7H

4-28

6-24

A 1B8H

4-28

6-24

A 1B9H

4-28

6-24

Droop Control: b7

User constants for droop functions are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Droop control gain

Droop control delay time

Sets the speed drop as a percentage of maximum speed when the maximum speed is specified and the rated torque occurs.

Droop-control is not performed when the setting is

0.0.

Droop control responsiveness constant

When hunting or oscillation occurs, increase the value.

0.0 to

100.0

0.03 to

2.00

0.0

Yes

0.05 s Yes

No 1CAH

No 1CBH

Page

4-28

6-117

4-28

6-117

-16

Autotuning Constants: C

The following settings are made with the autotuning constants (C constants): Acceleration/deceleration times, s-curve characteristics, speed control, and carrier frequency functions.

Acceleration/Deceleration: C1

User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

C1-01

Acceleration time 1

C1-02

Deceleration time 1

C1-03

Acceleration time 2

C1-04

Deceleration time 2

C1-05

Acceleration time 3

C1-06

Deceleration time 3

C1-07

Acceleration time 4

C1-08

Deceleration time 4

C1-09

Emergency stop time

Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum speed, in 1-second units.

Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0, in 1-second units.

The acceleration time when the multi-function input

“accel/decel time 1” is set to

ON.

The deceleration time when the multi-function input

“accel/decel time 1” is set to

ON.

The acceleration time when the multi-function input

“accel/decel time 2” is set to

ON.

The deceleration time when the multi-function input

“accel/decel time 2” is set to

ON.

The acceleration time when the multi-function input

“accel/decel time 1” and

“accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.

The deceleration time when the multi-function input

“accel/decel time 1” and

“accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.

The deceleration time when the multi-function input

“Emergency (fast) stop” is set to ON.

This function can be used as a stopping method when a fault has been detected.

0.0 to

6000.0

10.0 s

Yes

Q 200H

Q 201H

A 202H

A 203H

A 204H

A 205H

A 206H

A 207H

A 208H

4-5

4-28

6-20

4-5

4-28

6-20

4-28

6-20

4-28

6-20

4-28

6-20

4-28

6-20

4-28

6-20

4-28

6-20

4-28

6-19

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

C1-10

Accel/decel time setting unit

0: 0.01-second units

1: 0.1-second units

0 or 1 1 No A A A 209H

4-28

6-20

6-21

C1-11

Accel/decel time switching speed

Sets the speed for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.

Below set speed: Accel/ decel time 4

Above set speed: Accel/ decel time 1

The multi-function input

“accel/decel time 1” or

“accel/decel time 2” take priority.

0.0 to

100.0

0.0%

No A A A 20AH

4-28

6-20

* 2. The display unit varies in accordance with the control method. (The unit for open-loop/flux vector control for PM is given. For sequence test, Hz would be displayed.)

* 3. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. (The unit for open-loop/flux vector control for PM is given. For sequence test, the setting range would be 0.0 to 400.0.)

S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2

User constants for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

C2-01

C2-02

C2-03

C2-04

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end

All sections of the S-curve characteristic time are set in seconds units.

When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start

Run Command

Speed

C2-01

C2-02

OFF

C2-03

C2-04

Time

S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 s No

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 s No

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 s No

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 s No

A 20BH

A 20CH

A 20DH

A 20EH

4-28

6-21

4-28

6-21

4-28

6-21

4-28

6-21

-18

Speed Control (ASR): C5

User constants for speed control are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

C5-01

ASR proportional

(P) gain 1

C5-02

ASR integral (I) time 1

Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR.)

Sets the integral time of the speed loop (ASR) in 1-second units.

0.00 to

300.00

0.000 to

10.000

C5-03

C5-04

ASR proportional

(P) gain 2

ASR integral (I) time 2

C5-06

ASR primary delay time

Usually setting is not necessary.

Set to change the rotational speed gain.

0.00 to

300.00

P I

P=C5-01

I=C5-02

P=C5-03

I=C5-04

E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)

0.000 to

10.000

Sets the filter time constant for outputting torque references from the speed control loop (ASR). It is set in 1-second units.

Usually setting is not necessary.

0.000 to

0.500

10.00

0.500

10.00

0.500

0.016 s

Yes

21BH

21CH

21DH

21EH

220H

4-27

6-112

4-27

6-112

4-27

6-112

4-27

6-112

4-27

6-112

C5-07

C5-08

ASR switching frequency

ASR integral (I) limit

Sets the speed for switching between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and

Integral Time 1, 2 in % units.

The multi-function input “ASR switching proportional gain” has the priority.

Sets the upper limit for the integral

(I) amount for the speed control loop (ASR) to a percentage of the rated load.

0.0 to

100.0

0 to

400

C5-15

ASR proportional

(P) gain at start

Sets the proportional (P) gain at start of operation when magnetic poles are pulled in, in units of 0.01.

0.00 to

300.00

0.0%

5.00

400% No

221H

4-27

6-113

222H 6-113

238H -

* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)

User Constant Tables

Carrier Frequency: C6

User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

C6-01

CT/VT selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

0: Low carrier, constant torque

(CT)

1: High carrier, variable torque

(VT)

Select carrier frequency.

1: 2 kHz

2: 4 kHz

3: 6 kHz

4: 8 kHz

6: 12 kHz

0 or 1

1 or 2

1 to 6

*4 *6

*1 *5

Q 223H

4-5

4-28

6-2

A 224H 6-2

* 1. The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)

* 2. Inverter rated current will be reduced if increasing the carrier frequency.

Be careful because the possibility of an inverter OL error increases as the carrier frequency is increased.

* 3. With 400 V Class Inverters of 220 kW or 300 kW, C6-01 cannot be set to 0 (CT).

* 4. The setting range vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

* 5. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

* 6. For open-loop vector control for PM, the setting range is 1 to 4.

* 7. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT selection). If C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), C6-02 can only be set to 1 (2 kHz).

* 8. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT selection). If C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), the factory setting is 1 (2 kHz).

-20

Reference Constants: d

The following settings are made with the reference constants (d constants): Speed references.

Preset Reference: d1

User constants for speed references are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

0.00% Yes Q Q Q 280H

4-6

6-9 d1-01

Speed reference 1

Sets the speed reference in the units used in o1-03.

d1-02 d1-03 d1-04

Speed reference 2

The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 1 is ON for a multi-function input.

Speed reference 3

The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 2 is ON for a multi-function input.

Speed reference 4

The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 2 are ON for multi-function inputs.

0.00% Yes

Q 281H

Q 282H

Q 283H

4-6

6-9

4-6

6-9

4-6

6-9 d1-05

Speed reference 5

The speed when multi-step speed reference 3 is ON for a multi-function input.

0.00% Yes A A A 284H 6-9 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 d1-10 d1-11

Speed reference 6

The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.

0.00 to

100.00

Speed reference 7

The speed reference when multi-step speed references 2 and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.

Speed reference 8

The speed reference when multi-step speed references

1, 2, and 3 are ON for multifunction inputs.

Speed reference 9

The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 4 is ON for a multi-function input.

Speed reference 10

The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.

Speed reference 11

The speed reference when multi-step speed references 2 and 4 are ON for a multifunction inputs.

0.00% Yes

A 285H 6-9

A 286H 6-9

A 287H 6-9

A 288H

A 28BH

A 28CH -

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-15 d1-16 d1-17

Speed reference 12

Speed reference 13

Speed reference 14

Speed reference 15

Speed reference 16

Jog speed reference

The speed reference when multi-step speed references

1, 2, and 4 are ON for multifunction inputs.

The speed reference when multi-step speed references 3 and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.

The speed reference when multi-step speed references

1, 3, and 4 are ON for multifunction inputs.

The speed reference when multi-step speed references

2, 3, and 4 are ON for multifunction inputs.

The speed reference when multi-step speed references

1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.

The speed reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is ON.

0.00 to

100.00

0.00%

10.00%

Yes

28DH

28EH

28FH

290H

291H

292H

4-6

6-9

6-71

Note 1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor), default: 0.01 Hz.

2. A value less than the setting of El-09 (Min. speed) cannot be set for speed references. If you are having trouble setting the speed reference, check the setting of El-09.

* If the display unit is Hz, the setting ranges change. For open-loop/flux vector control or vector control with a PG for PM, the upper limits of the setting would be calculated by the following formula: E1-09 × E5-04 ÷ 120.

For sequence test, the upper limits of the setting would be E1-09.

Reference Limits: d2

User constants for speed reference limits are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page d2-01 d2-02 d2-03

Speed reference upper limit

Set the motor speed upper limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.

Speed reference lower limit

Master speed reference lower limit

Sets the motor speed lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.

Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.

0.0 to

110.0

100.0% No

0.0 to

110.0

0.0 to

110.0

0.0%

A 289H

A 28AH

A 293H

6-33

6-66

6-33

6-66

6-33

6-66

-22

Jump Speeds: d3

User constants for jump speeds are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page d3-01 d3-02 d3-03

Jump speed

Set the center values of the jump speeds in %.

This function is disabled by setting the jump speed to 0

%. Always ensure that the following applies: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03

Operation in the jump speed range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration, speed changes smoothly without jump.

0.0 to

100.0

0.0%

A 294H

A 295H

A 296H

4-28

6-30

4-28

6-30

4-28

6-30 d3-04

Jump speed width

Sets the jump speed bandwidth in %.

The jump speed will be the jump speed ± d3-04.

0.0 to

100.0

1.0%

No A A A 297H

4-28

6-30

* 1. The display units vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the display unit is Hz.

* 2. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 400.0.

* 3. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given.

For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 20.0.

Speed Reference Hold: d4

User constants for the speed reference hold function are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page d4-01

Speed reference hold function selection

Sets whether or not speeds on hold will be recorded.

0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at

0.)

1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at the previous hold speed.)

This function is available when the multi-function inputs “accel/decel Ramp

Hold” or “up/down” commands are set.

0 or 1 0 No No A A 298H 6-65

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name d4-02

+ - Speed limits

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

Set the speed to be add to or subtracted from the analog speed reference as a percent, taking the maximum speed to be 100%.

Enabled when the increase

(+) speed command or decrease (-) speed command is set for a multi-function input.

0 to

100

10% No No A A 299H 6-69

Torque Control: d5

User constants for the torque control are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page d5-01

Torque control selection

0: Speed control (C5-01 to

C5-07)

1: Torque control

To use the function for switching between speed and torque control, set to 0 and set the multi-function input to “speed/torque control change.”

0 or 1 d5-02 d5-03

Torque reference delay time

Set the torque reference delay time in ms units.

This function can be used to adjust the noise of the torque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during torque control, increase the set value.

Speed limit selection d5-04 Speed limit

Set the speed limit command method for the torque control method.

1: The analog input limit from a speed reference

(see b1-01)

2: Limited by d5-04 constant setting values.

Set the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum speed.

This function is enabled when d5-03 is set to 2.

Directions are as follows.

+: Run Command direction

-: Run Command opposite

direction

0 to

1000

1 or 2

-120 to

+120

0 ms

No 29AH 6-104

No 29BH 6-104

No 29CH 6-104

No 29DH 6-104

-24

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page d5-05

Speed limit bias

Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum speed.

Bias is given to the specified speed limit. It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit.

0 to

120

5% No d5-06

Speed/ torque control switching timer

Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input “speed/torque control change” (from On to OFF or

OFF to ON) until the control is actually changed, in ms units.

This function is enabled when the multi-function input “speed/torque control change” is set. In the speed/ torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the values of when the

“speed/torque control change” changes. Always be sure to allow time for this process to finish completely.

0 to

1000

50 ms

* The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.

29EH

29FH

6-104

6-105

User Constant Tables

Motor Constants: E

The following settings are made with the motor constants (E constants): V/f characteristics and motor constants.

V/f Pattern: E1

User constants for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

E1-01

E1-03

E1-04

Input voltage setting

V/f pattern selection

Set the Inverter input voltage in the unit of 1 V.

This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.

0 to E: Select from the 15 preset patterns.

F: Custom user-set patterns

(Applicable for settings

E1-04 to E1-10.)

This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

Max. speed

Set the maximum motor speed in units of 1 min

-1

The upper limit of maximum motor speed is 1.5 times greater than the values of the base speed of motor (E1-06).

155 to

255

0 to F

1000 to

2700

200 V

*1 *2

1750 min

-1

*1 *3

300H

302H

303H

Page

4-5

6-25

E1-05

Max. voltage

E1-06

Base speed

E1-07

E1-08

Mid. output speed

Mid. speed voltage

Set the base speed of motor in units of 1 min

-1

0.0 to

255.0

1000 to

1800

200.0

1750 min

-1

*1 *3

0.0 to

400.0

3.0 Hz No

No No 304H

Q Q 305H

No No 306H

No No 307H -

E1-09

Min. speed

E1-10

Min. speed voltage

Set the minimum speed of the motor in units of 1 min

-1

If A1-02 is set to 7, the lower limit of the motor’s minimum speed is 10% of the base speed of motor (E1-06).

0.0 to

255.0

15.0 V

100 to

1800

175 min

-1

*1 *3

*4 *5

0 to

1800

0.0 to

255.0

9.0 V

Q Q 308H

No No 309H -

-26

Constant

Number

E1-13

Name

Base voltage

Description

Set the base voltage of the motor in units of 0.1 V.

Setting

Range

0.0 to

255.0

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

190.0

*1 *2

No No Q Q

MEMO

BUS

30CH

Page

* 1. In open-loop/flux vector control for PM, this constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.

* 2. For 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.

* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).

The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min

-1

) are given.

* 4. The display units vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the display unit is Hz.

* 5. The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The setting for open-loop vector control for PM are given. For flux vector control for

PM, the setting is 30 min -1 . For sequence test, the setting is 0.0 Hz.

* 6. The settings for the sequence test method (A1-02=0) are calculated by the following formula.

To set the V/f characteristics in a straight line, assign the same values for E1-07 and E1-09.

If so, the setting of E1-08 is ignored.

Use the following formula to set the four frequencies:

E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06(FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

Output voltage (V)

VMAX

(E1-05)

(E1-08)

VMIN

(E1-10) Frequency (Hz)

FMIN

(E1-09)

(E1-07)

(E1-06)

FMAX

(E1-04)

* 7. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 40.0 to 400.0.

* 8. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 400.0.

User Constant Tables

Motor Setup: E2

User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

E2-01

Motor rated current

Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.

0.32 to

6.40

1.90 A

No Q No No 30EH

E2-02

Motor rated slip

Sets the motor rated slip in

Hz units.

These set values will become the reference values for slip compensation.

0.00 to

20.00

2.90

No A No No 30FH

E2-03

E2-05

E2-10

E2-11

Motor noload current

Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units.

Motor lineto-line resistance

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

Sets the motor phase-tophase resistance in Ω units.

Sets motor iron loss in W units.

Motor rated output

Set the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01 kW.

This constant is automatically set during autotuning.

0.00 to

1.89

0.000

65.000

0 to

65535

0.00 to

650.00

1.20 A

9.842

14 W

0.40 kW

* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.

* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.

* 3. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

* 4. Initialize E2-11 to set the same value as that for the Inverter capacity.

310H

312H

317H

318H

Page

-28

PM Motor Constants: E5

User constants for PM motor are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

E5-01

Motor capacity selection

Select the motor capacity.

By setting E5-01, the constants that vary in accordance with motor capacity will be automatically set.

After making a selection, do not change this setting unless necessary. If changed, the motor constants will be initialized.

0000 to

0230

0000 to

0235

0000

No No Q Q 329H -

E5-02

Motor rated capacity

Set the motor rated capacity in units of 0.01 kW.

The setting is initialized and set to the standard capacity if the selection of the Inverter capacity

(o2-04) or that of the motor capacity (E5-01) is changed.

0.40 to

160.00

0.40 to

300.00

E5-03

E5-04

Motor rated current

Set the motor rated current in units of 0.01 A for a motor with a capacity of 7.5 kW or less, or in units of 0.1 A for one with a capacity of 11 kW or more.

0.00 to

2000.0

Number of motor poles

Set the number of motor poles.

E5-05

E5-06

Motor armature resistance

Motor daxis inductance

Set the resistance per motor phase in units of 0.001 Ω .

After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.

Set the motor d-axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH.

After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.

0.000 to

65.000

0.00 to

300.00

E5-07

E5-09

Motor qaxis inductance

Set the motor q-axis inductance with the motor rated load in units of 0.01 mH.

Motor induced voltage constant

0.00 to

600.00

Set the peak value of the induced voltage per motor phase in units of 0.1 mV/(rad/s) [electric angle].

Do not change this setting unless necessary.

50.0 to

2000.0

0.40

1.65

6 pole

8.233

54.84

64.10

223.0 mV ⋅ sec/ rad

Q 32AH 4-9

Q 32BH 4-9

Q 32CH 4-9

Q 32DH 4-9

Q 32EH 4-9

Q 32FH 4-9

Q 331H 4-9

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

E5-10

Phase lead compensation

Compensate for the positioning error between the calculated position of the magnetic pole

(control axis) and the actual position.

Set in units of 0.1 deg (electric angle).

Do not change this setting unless necessary.

-180.0 to

180.0

10.0

deg

No No No A 332H

Page

E5-11

PG home position offset

Set the amount of pulses to align the home position in units of 0.1 degrees.

-180.0 to

180.0

0.0

deg

No No A No 333H

Note: The E5 constants are not initialized by the initialize operation.

* 1. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the Inverter capacity selection (o2-04) or control method selection (A1-02).

The values for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ) are given.

* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).

The values for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min

-1

) are given.

4-9

-30

Option Constants: F

The following settings are made with the option constants (F constants): Settings for option cards

PG Option Setup: F1

User constants for the PG Speed Control Board are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

F1-02

Operation selection at

PG open circuit

(PGO)

F1-03

Operation selection at overspeed

(OS)

F1-04

Operation selection at deviation

Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.

0: Ramp to stop

(Deceleration stop using

Deceleration Time 1, C1-

02.)

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-

09.)

3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, do not normally make this setting.)

Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.

0: Ramp to stop

(Deceleration stop using

Deceleration Time 1, C1-

02.)

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-

09.)

3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, do not normally make this setting.)

Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation

(DEV) fault occurs.

0: Ramp to stop

(Deceleration stop using

Deceleration Time 1, C1-

02.)

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-

09.)

3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)

0 to 3

No 381H 6-129

No 382H 6-49

A 383H 6-50

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

F1-05 PG rotation

F1-08

F1-09

F1-10

F1-11

Overspeed detection level

Overspeed detection delay time

0: Phase A leads with Forward Run Command.

(Phase B leads with

Reverse Run Command.)

1: Phase B leads with Forward Run Command.

(Phase A leads with

Reverse Run Command.)

Sets the overspeed detection method.

Speeds above that set for F1-

08 (set as a percentage of the maximum speed) that continue to exceed this speed for the time set in F1-09 (unit: s) are detected as overspeed faults.

0 or 1

0 to

120

0.0 to

2.0

115%

0.0 s

Excessive speed deviation detection level

Excessive speed deviation detection delay time

Sets the speed deviation detection method.

Any speed deviation above the F1-10 set level (set as a percentage of the maximum speed) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is detected as a speed deviation.

Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the reference command speed.

0 to 50 10%

0.0 to

10.0

0.5 s

384H

387H

388H

389H

38AH

Page

6-129

6-49

6-50

F1-14

F1-18

PG opencircuit detection time

DV3 Detection selection

Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be detected if the detection time continues beyond the set time.

Sets the conditions of DV3 detection (inversion detection).

0: DV3 detection disabled n: DV3 detection enabled if

DV3 detection conditions are detected for 5 ms × n times in succession.

0.0 to

10.0

0 to 5

2.0 s

F1-19

DV4 Detection selection

Sets the conditions of DV4 detection (inversion prevention detection).

0: DV4 detection disabled n: DV4 detection enabled if n pulses of A/B phase pulse inverted to the speed reference are detected.

0 to

5000

128

* The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.

Νο

38DH 6-129

3ADH 6-129

3AEH 6-129

-32

Analog Reference Board: F2

User constants for the Analog Reference Board are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

F2-01

Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection

Sets the functions for channel 1 to 3 which are effective when the AI-14B Analog

Reference Board is used.

0: 3-channel individual

(Channel 1: terminal A1,

Channel 2: terminal A2,

Channel 3: terminal A3)

1: 3-channel addition (Addition values are the frequency reference)

When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01. In this case the multifunction input “Option/

Inverter selection” cannot be used.

0 or 1 0 No A A A 38FH 6-135

Digital Reference Board: F3

User constants for the Digital Reference Board are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

F3-01

Digital input option

Sets the Digital Reference

Board input method.

0: BCD 1% unit

1: BCD 0.1% unit

2: BCD 0.01% unit

3: BCD 1 Hz unit

4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit

5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit

6: BCD special setting (5digit input)

7: Binary input

6 is only effective when the

DI-16H2 is used.

When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher, the input will be

BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03 setting.

0 to 7 0 No A A A 390H 6-135

User Constant Tables

Analog Monitor Boards: F4

User constants for the Analog Monitor Board are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

F4-01

F4-02

F4-03

F4-04

Name

Channel 1 monitor selection

Channel 1 gain

Channel 2 monitor selection

Channel 2 gain

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Effective when the Analog

Monitor Board is used.

Monitor selection:

Set the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1-

)

The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.

Gain:

Set the multiple of 10 V for outputting monitor items.

4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to 41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to

77, and 79 to 82 cannot be set. 23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to

48, 50 to 57, 59, 60, 62, 64 to

67, and 83 to 99 are not used.

When the AO-12 Analog

Monitor Board is used, outputs of ± 10 V are possible.

To output ± 10 V, set F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When the AO-

08 Analog Monitor Board is used, only outputs of 0 to

+10 V are possible.

A meter calibration function is available.

1 to 99

0.00 to

2.50

0.00 to

2.50

1.00

1 to 99 3

0.50

Yes

391H

392H

393H

394H

Page

6-77

Sets the channel 1 item bias to 100%/10 V when the Analog Monitor Board is used.

-10.0 to

10.0

0.0% Yes A A A 395H 6-77 F4-05

F4-06

F4-07

F4-08

Channel 1 output monitor bias

Channel 2 output monitor bias

Analog output signal level for channel 1

Analog output signal level for channel 2

Sets the channel 2 item bias to 100%/10 V when the Analog Monitor Board is used.

-10.0 to

10.0

0: 0 to 10 V

1: -10 to +10 V

0: 0 to 10 V

1: -10 to +10 V

0 or 1

0.0%

Yes

396H

397H

398H

6-78

* 1. Adjustment target is the CH1 output when the F4-02 or F4-05 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.

Adjustment target is the CH2 output when the F4-04 or F4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.

To adjust the meter, multiply a value equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting, and then add the set bias.

* 2. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.

-34

Digital Output Boards (DO-02C and DO-08): F5

User constants for the Digital Output Board are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

F5-01

Channel 1 output selection

Effective when a Digital

Output Board (DO-02C or

DO-08) is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

0 to 3D 0 No No A A 399H 6-132

F5-02

Channel 2 output selection

Effective when a Digital

Output Board (DO-02C or

DO-08) is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

0 to 3D

No No A A 39AH 6-132

F5-03

F5-04

Channel 3 output selection

Channel 4 output selection

Effective when a DO-08

Digital Output Board is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

0 to 3D

Effective when a DO-08

Digital Output Board is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

0 to 3D

F5-05

Channel 5 output selection

Effective when a DO-08

Digital Output Board is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

0 to 3D

F5-06

F5-07

F5-08

Channel 6 output selection

Channel 7 output selection

Channel 8 output selection

F5-09

DO-08 output mode selection

Effective when a DO-08

Digital Output Board is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

0 to 3D

Effective when a DO-08

Digital Output Board is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08

Digital Output Board is used.

Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.

Effective when a DO-08

Digital Output Board is used.

Set the output mode.

0: 8-channel individual outputs

1: Binary code output

2: Output according to

F5-01 to F5-08 settings.

0 to 3D 0F

0 to 2 0

A 39BH 6-132

A 39CH 6-132

A 39DH 6-133

A 39EH 6-133

A 39FH 6-133

A 3A0H 6-133

A 3A1H 6-133

User Constant Tables

Communications Option Cards: F6

User constants for a Communications Option Card are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

F6-01

Operation selection after communications error

Set the stopping method for communications errors.

0: Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1-

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-

3: Continue operation

0 to 3 1 No A A A 3A2H

F6-02

Input level of external fault from

Communications

Option Card

0: Always detect

1: Detect during operation

0 or 1 0 No A A A 3A3H

F6-03

F6-06

Stopping method for external fault from

Communications

Option Card

Torque reference/ torque limit selection from optical option

0: Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1-

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-

3: Continue operation

0: Torque reference/torque limit from transmission disabled.

1: Torque reference/torque limit from transmission enabled.

0 to 3

0 or 1

A 3A4H

A 3A7H

Page

-36

Terminal Function Constants: H

The following settings are made with the terminal function constants (H constants): Settings for external terminal functions.

Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1

User constants for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

H1-01

H1-02

H1-03

H1-04

H1-05

H1-06

Terminal S3 function selection

Multi-function contact input

Terminal S4 function selection

Multi-function contact input

Terminal S5 function selection

Multi-function contact input

Terminal S6 function selection

Multi-function contact input

Terminal S7 function selection

Multi-function contact input

Terminal S8 function selection

Multi-function contact input

0 to 78

0 to

768

0 to 78

3 (0)

4 (3)

6 (4)

* The values in parentheses indicate factory settings when initialized in 3-wire sequence.

400H

401H

402H

403H

404H

4-5H

Page

Multi-function Contact Input Functions

Setting

Value

Function

3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run Command)

Local/Remote selection (ON: Local, OFF: Remote)

Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option card)

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

Page

Yes Yes Yes 6-15

Yes Yes Yes 6-63

Yes Yes Yes

6-70

6-135

Multi-step speed reference 1

When H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.

Multi-step speed reference 2

Multi-step speed reference 3

Jog speed command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)

Accel/decel time 1

External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)

Yes Yes Yes 6-9

Yes Yes Yes 6-21

Yes Yes Yes 6-64

User Constant Tables

Setting

Value

Function

9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)

Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency on hold)

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

Page

Yes Yes Yes 6-64

No Yes Yes 6-65

B OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)

C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)

E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)

F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)

Yes

6-113

Up command (Always set with the down command)

Down command (Always set with the up command)

FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)

RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)

14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)

Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)

Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)

No Yes Yes 6-66

No Yes Yes 6-71

Yes Yes Yes 7-2

Yes

6-19

Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function outputs are set in H1 and H2 .)

19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)

1A Accel/Decel time 2

Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants other than speed monitor are write protected.)

1C Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 speed is added to analog speed reference.)

Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 speed is subtracted from analog speed reference.)

1E Analog speed reference sample/hold

20 to

External fault (Desired settings possible)

Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation

Yes

Yes Yes

6-93

7-20

Yes Yes Yes 6-98

Yes Yes Yes 6-21

Yes

Yes Yes

6-126

7-20

No Yes 6-69

Yes

6-69

6-70

6-72

PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)

31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)

Yes Yes Yes 6-98

32 Multi-step speed reference 4

34 PID soft starter ON/OFF

Yes Yes Yes 6-98

35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes 6-98

61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) No No Yes 6-53

62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)

Communications test mode (“Pass” is displayed when the communication test is passed.)

Yes

No Yes 6-53

Yes

6-98

6-93

Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)

Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)

78 Polarity reversing command for external torque reference

No Yes No

6-106

6-111

No Yes No 6-113

No Yes No 6-106

-38

Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2

User constants for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

H2-01

H2-02

H2-03

H2-06

Terminal

M1-M2 function selection

(contact)

Multi-function contact output

Terminal P1 function selection

(open collector)

Multi-function contact output 1

Terminal P2 function selection

(open collector)

Multi-function contact output 2

Integral power output level selection

Select the output level for the multi-function contact when selecting 39 to one of

H2-01 to H2-03.

0: 0.1 kWh

1: 1 kWh

2: 10 kWh

3: 100 kWh

4: 1000 kWh

0 to 3D

0 to 4

A 40BH

A 40CH

A 40DH -

A 437H 6-75

Multi-function Contact Output Functions

Setting

Value

During run (ON: Run Command is ON or voltage is being output)

Zero-speed

Function

2 Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.)

Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency agree)

Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02 used)

Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, L4-02 used)

Inverter operation ready

READY: After initialization, no faults

During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

Page

Yes Yes Yes 6-73

Yes Yes Yes 6-39

Yes

6-39

During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)

Speed reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)

A Run Command selection status (ON: Run Command from Operator)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)

C Loss of speed reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)

Yes Yes Yes

Yes

6-42

6-58

User Constant Tables

Setting

Value

Function

D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)

Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and

CPF01 has occurred.)

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

Page

Yes Yes Yes 6-61

Yes Yes Yes -

F Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.)

10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)

11 Fault reset command active

12 Timer function output

Yes

6-93

13 Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used)

Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and during frequency agree)

Yes

6-39

15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ L4-03, L4-04 used)

16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ L4-03, L4-04 used)

Yes

6-39

17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 6-42

18 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes 6-42

19 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 6-42

1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) Yes Yes Yes -

1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)

1D During regeneration (ON: During regeneration)

Yes

Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)

Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)

20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)

2F Maintenance timer display (ON: Maintenance timer for capacitors or fans.)

30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)

Yes

Yes Yes 6-59

Yes Yes

6-45

6-74

Yes Yes Yes 6-74

Yes

No Yes 6-74 31 During speed limit (ON: During speed limit)

Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).

Output if the external torque reference is limited (the internal torque reference is less than the external torque reference) when the torque control is selected.

During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)

The integral power has exceeded the output level set to H2-06. (Contact output for 200 ms.)

3A Fan fault alarm (NO contact output)

Yes

6-106

6-73

6-74

Fan fault alarm (NC contact output)

Magnetic pole detection completed (ON: Magnetic pole detection completed.)

Inverter's Circulation Fan Fault (ON: Fault)

Yes Yes Yes 6-75

No Yes Yes -

Yes Yes Yes 6-60

-40

Analog Inputs: H3

User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

H3-01

Signal level selection

(terminal

A1)

0: 0 to 10 V

1: − 10 to 10 V

Sets the speed when 10 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum speed.

Sets the speed when 0 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum speed.

H3-04

Signal level selection

(terminal

A3)

H3-05

Multi-function analog input (terminal A3) function selection

0: 0 to 10 V

1: − 10 to 10 V

Select from the functions listed in the following table.

Refer to the next page.

0 or 1

-100.0

+100.0

0 or 1

0 to 1F

0.0 to

1000.0 100.0%

0.0%

Yes

A 410H 6-27

A 411H 6-27

A 412H 6-27

A 413H

A 414H

6-27

6-105

6-27

6-105

H3-09

Multi-function analog input

(terminal

A2) function selection

Sets the input gain (level) when 10V is input.

Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.

Sets the input gain (level) when 0V is input.

Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.

H3-08

Signal level selection

(terminal

A2)

0: 0 to +10V, with lower limit

1: − 10 to +10 V, lower limit

2: 4 to 20 mA.

without

Switch current and voltage input using the switch on the control panel.

Select multi-function analog input function for terminal

A2. Refer to the next table.

0.0 to

1000.0 100.0%

100.0 to

+100.0

0 to 2

0 to 1F

0.0%

H3-10

Gain

(terminal

A2)

H3-11

Bias

(terminal

A2)

Sets the input gain (level) when 10 V (20 mA) is input.

Set according to the 100% value for the function set for

H3-09.

Sets the input gain (level) when 0 V (4 mA) is input.

Set according to the 100% value for the function set for

H3-09.

0.0 to

1000.0 100.0%

-100.0

+100.0

0.0%

Yes

A 415H

A 416H

A 417H

A 418H

A 419H

A 41AH

6-27

6-105

6-27

6-105

6-27

6-105

6-27

6-105

6-28

6-105

6-28

6-105

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

H3-12

Analog input filter time constant

H3-13

Name

Terminal

A1/A2 switching

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

Sets primary delay filter time constant in seconds for the analog input terminal.

Effective for noise control etc.

0.00 to

2.00

0: Use terminal A1 analog input as main speed reference.

1: Use terminal A2 analog input as main speed reference.

Effective when H3-09 is set to 2 and H3-05 is not set to 0 or 2.

0 or 1

0.03 s

41BH

41CH

4-28

6-28

H3-05 and H3-09 Settings

Setting

Value

Function

Add to terminal A1

Contents (100%)

Maximum speed

1 Speed gain

Speed reference (voltage) command value

2nd step analog

(Auxiliary speed reference)

Accel/decel change

(reduction coefficient)

Overtorque/undertorque detection level

Speed reference lower limit level

Jump speed

PID feedback

PID target value

Speed bias 2

Motor temperature input

10 Positive torque limit

11 Negative torque limit

12 Regenerative torque limit

Torque reference/torque limit at speed control

14 Torque compensation

15 Positive/negative torque limit

1F Analog input not used.

16 to 1E Not used

Maximum speed

Set acceleration and deceleration times

(C1-01 to C1-08)

Motor rated torque for vector control

Inverter rated output current for sequence test mode

Maximum speed

10 V = 100%

Motor’s rated torque

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

Page

Yes Yes Yes

6-29

6-106

Yes Yes Yes 6-29

Yes

6-10

6-22

6-44

6-34

Yes Yes Yes 6-31

Yes Yes Yes 6-98

Yes Yes Yes 6-29

Yes No No

No Yes Yes

6-35

6-106

6-35

6-10

-42

Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4

User constants for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

H4-01

H4-02

H4-03

H4-04

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Monitor selection

(terminal

FM)

Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-

) from terminal FM. The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.

4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to 41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to

77, 79 to 82 cannot be set.

23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to 48,

50 to 57, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 83 to 99 are not used.

Gain (terminal FM)

Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.

Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.

The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

A meter calibration function is available.

Bias (terminal FM)

Monitor selection

(terminal

AM)

1 to 99

0.00 to

2.50

1.00

Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.

Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.

The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

A meter calibration function is available.

-10.0 to

+10.0

Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-

) from terminal AM.

The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.

4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to 41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to

77, 79 to 82 cannot be set.

23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to 48,

50 to 57, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 83 to 99 are not used.

1 to 99

0.0%

Yes

41DH

41EH

41FH

420H

Page

6-76

4-6

6-76

H4-05

Gain (terminal AM)

Set the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output 2.

Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the

100% output for the monitor items. The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

A meter calibration function is available.

0.00 to

2.50

0.50

Yes Q Q Q 421H

4-6

6-77

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

H4-06

H4-07

Analog output 1 signal level selection

H4-08

Bias (terminal AM)

Analog output 2 signal level selection

Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.

Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.

The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

A meter calibration function is available.

-10.0 to

+10.0

Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1

(terminal FM)

0: 0 to +10 V output

1: − 10 to 10 V output

Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2

(terminal AM)

0: 0 to +10 V output

1: − 10 to 10 V output

0 or 1

0.0%

Yes

422H

423H

424H

6-77

* 1. Adjustment target is the FM terminal when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.

Adjustment target is the AM terminal when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.

To adjust the meter, multiply a value that is equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting and add the set bias.

* 2. The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed.

MEMOBUS Communications: H5

User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

H5-01

H5-02

Slave address

Set the Inverter's slave address.

Communication speed selection

Set the baud rate for

MEMOBUS communications of communications connection terminals.

0: 1200 bps

1: 2400 bps

2: 4800 bps

3: 9600 bps

4: 19200 bps

H5-03

Communication parity selection

Set the parity for MEMO-

BUS communications of communications connection terminals.

0: No parity

1: Even parity

2: Odd parity

0 to 20

0 to 4

0 to 2

1FH

Page

A 425H 6-83

A 426H 6-83

A 427H 6-83

-44

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

H5-04

H5-05

H5-06

H5-07

Stopping method after communication error

RTS control ON/

OFF

Set the stopping method for communications errors.

0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in

C1-02

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-

3: Continue operation

Communication error detection selection

Send wait time

Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a communications error.

0: Do not detect.

1: Detect

Set the time from the

Inverter receiving data to when the Inverter starts to send.

Select to enable or disable

RTS control.

0: Disabled (RTS is always

ON)

1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)

0 to 3

0 or 1

5 to 65 5 ms

0 or 1

* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.

428H

429H

42AH

42BH

6-83

6-84

Pulse Train I/O: H6

User constants for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

H6-01

H6-02

Pulse train input function selection

Pulse train input scaling

0: Speed reference

1: PID feedback value

2: PID target value

0 to 2 0 No No

A 42CH

A 42DH

6-5

6-32

6-97

6-5

6-32

H6-03

Pulse train input gain

H6-04

Pulse train input bias

H6-05

Pulse train input filter time

Set the number of pulses in hertz, taking the reference to be 100%.

1000 to

32000

Set the input gain level as a percent when the pulse train set in H6-02 is input.

0.0 to

1000.0

1440

Yes

100.0% Yes

Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0.

-100.0 to

100.0

0.0% Yes

Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time constant in seconds.

0.00 to

2.00

0.10 s Yes

A 42EH 6-32

A 42FH 6-32

A 430H 6-32

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name

H6-06

Pulse train monitor selection

H6-07

Pulse train monitor scaling

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

Select the pulse train monitor output items (value of the

part of U1 ).

There are two types of monitor items: Speed-related items and PID-related items.

Set the number of pulses output when speed is 100% in

Hz.

Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to

0, to make the pulse train monitor output synchronously to the motor speed.

1, 2, 5,

20, 24,

0 to

32000

1440

Yes

431H

432H

6-79

Protection Function Constants: L

The following settings are made with the protection function constants (L constants): Motor protection selection, power loss ride through function, overvoltage inhibit selection function, speed detection, fault restart, torque detection, torque limits, and hardware protection.

Motor Overload: L1

User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

L1-01

Motor protection selection

Sets whether the motor overload protection function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay.

0: Disabled

4: Variable torque PM motor

5: Constant torque PM motor

6: Increased safety, explosion-proof PM motor (variable torque)

In some applications when the Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this constant is set to 4, 5, or 6

(Motor protection function enabled), protection may not be effective.

0 or 4

0, 4, 5,

*1 *2

No No A

Page

A 480H 6-45

-46

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

L1-02

Motor protection time constant

Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.

Usually setting is not necessary.

The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.

When the motor's overload resistance is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.

0.1 to

5.0

1.0 min

* 1. This constant is not unitized by the initialize operation.

* 2. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.

No A A A 481H

Page

6-45

Power Loss Ridethrough: L2

User constants for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L2-01

L2-02

L2-03

Momentary power loss detection

0: Disabled (UV fault detection at momentary power loss)

1: Enabled (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2- 02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-02.)

2: Enabled during CPU operation (Restart if power returns during

CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)

3: KEB operation (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2-02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-

02.)

4: KEB operation during

CPU operation (Restart if power returns during

CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)

Momentary power loss ridethru time

Sets the Ridethrough time in units of seconds, when

Momentary Power Loss

Selection (L2-01) is set to 1 or 3.

Min. baseblock time

Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time in units of one second, when the

Inverter is restarted after power loss ride through.

0 to 4

0 to

60.0

0.1 to

5.0

0.1 s

A 485H 6-52

A 486H 6-52

A 487H 6-52

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L2-05

L2-06

Undervoltage detection level

KEB deceleration time

Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level

(main circuit DC voltage) in

V units.

Usually setting is not necessary.

Insert an AC reactor in the

Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level.

Enabled when L2-01 is set to

3 or 4.

Sets the deceleration time in seconds from the maximum speed to zero-speed at momentary power loss command (KEB).

Controller power supply will be extended if deceleration time is shortened.

150 to

210

0.0 to

200.0

190 V

30.0 s

* 1. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. (The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class Inverters are given.)

* 2. These are values for 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverter are twice as large.

* 3. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.

489H

48AH

6-52

-48

Overvoltage Inhibit Selection: L3

User constants for the overvoltage inhibit selection function are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L3-11

Overvoltage inhibit selection

Sets the function to inhibit overvoltage in the Inverter

DC bus.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Reduces the regenerative torque limit automatically, depending on the

DC bus voltage, to prevent the overvoltage

(OV).

Deceleration time might be longer than the setting due to auto-adjustment of the decelerating rate.

If decelerating with a braking unit or braking resister, set L3-11 to 0 (Disabled). If this is not done, deceleration cannot be achieved in the desired deceleration time.

0 or 1 1 No No A A 4C7H

4-28

6-25

7-3

Speed Detection: L4

User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L4-01

Speed agreement detection level

L4-02

Speed agreement detection width

Effective when “Desired speed agree 1”, “Speed detection 1>”, or “Speed detection 1<” is set for a multi-function output.

Speeds to be detected are set as a percentage of maximum speed.

Effective when “Speed agree

1,” “Desired speed agree 1,” or “Speed detection 1<” is set for a multi-function output.

Sets the speed detection width as a percentage of maximum speed.

0.0 to

100.0

0.0 to

40.0

0.0%

4.0%

A 499H 6-38

A 49AH 6-38

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L4-03

L4-04

Speed agreement detection level (+/-)

Speed agreement detection width (+/-)

Effective when “Desired speed agree 2”, “Desired speed agree1”, “Speed detection3>” or “Speed detection 4<” is set for a multi-function output.

Speed that should be detected is set as a percentage of maximum speed.

Effective when “Speed agree

2”, “Desired speed agree 1”, or “Speed detection 4<” is set for a multi-function output.

Speed detection width is set as a percentage of maximum speed.

-100.0 to

+100.0

0.0 to

40.0

L4-05

Operation when speed reference is missing

0: Stop (Operation follows the speed reference.)

1: Operation at 80% speed continues. (At 80% of speed before the speed reference was lost)

Speed reference is lost:

Speed reference dropped over 90% in 400 ms.

0 or 1

0.0%

4.0%

49BH

49CH

49DH

6-38

6-58

Fault Restart: L5

User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L5-01

Number of auto restart attempts

Sets the number of auto restart attempts.

Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run speed.

0 to 10

L5-02

Auto restart operation selection

Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.

0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)

1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)

0 or 1

A 49EH 6-59

A 49FH 6-59

-50

Torque Detection: L6

User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L6-01

Torque detection selection 1

0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.

1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque

(warning).

2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).

3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).

4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).

5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque

(warning).

6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).

7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).

8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).

0 to 8 0 No No A A 4A1H 6-41

L6-02

L6-03

Torque detection level 1

Torque detection time 1

Motor rated torque is set as

100%.

Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time in 1second units.

0 to

300

0.0 to

10.0

150%

0.1 s

A 4A2H 6-42

A 4A3H 6-42

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name

L6-04

Torque detection selection 2

L6-05

L6-06

Torque detection level 2

Torque detection time 2

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

Torque detection 1 is output from the multi-function output by setting the overtorque/undertorque detection

1NO (B) or 1NC (17) to the multi-function output (H2-

Torque detection 2 is output from the multi-function output by setting the overtorque/undertorque detection

2NO (18) or 2NC (19) to the multi-function output (H2-

0 to 8

0 to

300

0.0 to

10.0

150%

0.1 s

4A4H

4A5H

4A6H

6-42

Torque Limits: L7

User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

L7-01

L7-02

Name

Forward drive torque limit

Reverse drive torque limit

L7-03

Forward regenerative torque limit

L7-04

Reverse regenerative torque limit

Description

Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.

Four individual regions can be set.

Output torque

Positive torque

Reverse

Regenerative state

No. of motor rotations

Forward

Negative torque

0 to

160

0 to

300

0 to

160

0 to

300

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

0 to

160

0 to

300

160% No No A A 4A7H

4-28

6-35

0 to

160

0 to

300

160%

4A8H

4A9H

4AAH

4-28

6-35

4-28

6-35

4-28

6-35

Note: To protect the Inverter, the upper torque limit will be reduced automatically.

The upper torque limit depends on the setting of the carrier frequency (C6-02).

-52

Hardware Protection: L8

User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

L8-01

L8-02

L8-03

L8-05

L8-07

L8-08

Protect selection for internal DB resistor

(Type ERF)

0: Disabled (no overheating protection)

1: Enabled (overheating protection)

Overheat pre-alarm level

Operation selection after overheat prealarm

Input openphase protection selection

Output open-phase protection selection

Output open-phase detection level

Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in ° C.

The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.

Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat prealarm goes ON.

0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop in fast-stop time

C1-09.

3: Continue operation

(Monitor display only.)

A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Detects if input current open-phase, power supply voltage imbalance or main circuit electrostatic capacitor deterioration occurs.)

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Detects one output open-phase.)

2: Enabled (Detects more than one output openphases)

When applied motor capacity is small for Inverter capacity, output open-phase may be detected inadvertently or open-phase may not be detected. In this case, set to 0.

Output open-phase will be detected if any U, V, W phase output current has been under the setting level of the L8-08 for 500 ms or more when output current >

30% and soft-starter output ≥

1.0 Hz.

UP/DOWN counter counts this 500 ms.

0 or 1

50 to

130

0 to 3

0 or 1

0 to 2

0.0 to

20.0

95 ° C

5.0%

A 4ADH 6-61

A 4AEH 6-62

A 4AFH 6-62

A 4B1H

4B3H

A 4B4H -

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

L8-09

L8-10

L8-11

L8-12

L8-15

L8-29

L8-32

Ground protection selection

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Cooling fan control selection

Cooling fan control delay time

Ambient temperature

OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds

Current imbalance protection selection

OH1 detection of

Inverter’ s cooling fan

Set the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.

0: ON only when Inverter is

1: ON whenever power is

Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the cooling fan

OFF command is received.

Set the ambient temperature.

If set to 60 ° C, the Inverter overload protection function

(OL2) will start 20% earlier.

0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.

1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.

Usually, setting is not required.

Stops the Inverter if threephase output current imbalance occurs due to a photocoupler fault or open-phase.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Disabled (FAN minor fault detection)

1: Enabled (OH1 major fault detection)

0 or 1

0 to

300

45 to

0 or 1

60 s

° C

* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

* 2. The setting value will return to the factory setting it the control method is changed.

4B5H

4B6H

4B7H

4B8H

4BBH

4DFH

4E2H

Page

6-60

-54

N: Special Adjustments

The following settings are unique to each control methods.

Magnetic Pole Detection: N8

User constants for magnetic pole detection are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

N8-01

N8-02

Current of magnetic pole calculation at start

Magnetic pole pull-in current

Set the current of magnetic pole calculation at start as a percentage of the motor rated current (E5-03).

Normally, setting adjustments are not required.

If the “Si” value is written on the motor name plate, set the

Si value to the N8-01.

Set the current pulling in the magnetic pole at start as a percentage of the motor rated current (E5-03).

To increase the starting torque, change the setting to a larger value.

0 to

100

0 to

150

50%

80%

* The setting value will return to be the factory setting if control method is changed.

540H

541H

Page

User Constant Tables

Digital Operator Constants: o

The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants (o constants): Multi-function selections and the copy function.

Monitor Select: o1

User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Monitor selection

Monitor selection after power up

Frequency units of reference setting and monitor

Set the number of the monitor item to be displayed in the earliest 4 monitor items.

(U1 )

The output monitor voltage

(factory setting) can be changed.

Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.

1: Speed reference

2: Motor speed

3: Output current

4: The monitor item set for o1-01

Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the speed reference and speed monitor.

0: 0.01 Hz units

1: 0.01% units

(Maximum output frequency is 100%)

2 to 39: min

-1

units (Sets the motor poles.)

40 to 39999:

User desired display

Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.

4 to 99

1 to 4

0 to

39999

Yes

A 500H

A 501H 6-119

A 502H

Page

6-119

6-136 o1-05

Set 4-digit number excluding the decimal point.

Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display.

Example: When the max. output frequency value is

200.0, set 12000

LCD brightness adjustment

LCD Contrast

Set a smaller value to lighten the LCD and a larger value to darken the LCD (standard:

3).

0 to 5 3 Yes A A A 504H -

-56

Multi-function Selections: o2

User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

LOCAL/

REMOTE key enable/ disable

STOP key during control circuit terminal operation

User constant initial value

Sets the Digital Operator

Local/Remote Key

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital

Operator and the constant settings.)

Sets the Stop Key in the run mode.

0: Disabled (When the Run

Command is issued from and external terminal, the

Stop Key is disabled.)

1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)

Clears or stores user initial values.

0: Stores/not set

1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as user initial values.)

2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)

When the set constants are recorded as user initial values, 1110 will be set in A1-

03.

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 kVA selection

Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected

This constant is set at factory. Usually, setting is not required.

Speed reference setting method selection

When the speed reference is set on the Digital Operator speed reference monitor, sets whether the Enter Key is necessary.

0: Enter Key needed

1: Enter Key not needed

When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the speed reference without Enter Key operation.

Sets the operation when the

Digital Operator is disconnected.

0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the

Digital Operator is disconnected.)

1: Enabled (OPR is detected at Digital Operator disconnection. Inverter output is cut off, and fault contact is operated.)

0 to FF 0 *

0 or 1

505H

506H

507H

508H

509H

50AH

6-119

6-120

4-26

6-120

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Cumulative operation time setting

Cumulative operation time selection

Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.

Operation time is calculated from the set values.

0: Cumulative time when the Inverter power is on.

(All time while the

Inverter power is on is accumulated.)

1: Cumulative Inverter run time. (Only Inverter output time is accumulated.)

0 to

65535

0 or 1

0 hr

A o2-10 o2-12 o2-14 o2-18

Fan operation time setting

Fault trace/ fault history clear function

Output power monitor clear selection

Capacitor maintenance setting

Set the initial value of the fan operation time using time units.

The operation time accumulates from the set value.

0: Disabled (U2 and U3 constants are on hold.)

1: Enabled (Initializes U2 and U3 constants.)

0: Holds output power monitor.

1: Initializes output power monitor. (Returns to 0.)

Clears the electrolytic capacitor maintenance (U1-61)

[setting:0] and sets the setting value in % unit.

0 to

65535

0 or 1

0 to

150

0 hr

* The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

Page

50BH 6-120

50CH

50EH

510H

512H

51DH

6-120

5-64

-58

Copy Function: o3

User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page o3-01

Copy function selection

0: Normal operation

1: READ (Inverter to

Operator)

2: COPY (Operator to

Inverter)

3: Verify (compare)

0 to 3 0 No A A A 515H 6-122 o3-02

Read permitted selection

0: Read prohibited

1: Read permitted

0 or 1 0 No A A A 516H 6-122

User Constant Tables

T: Motor Autotuning

Autotunig Mode: T1

The following setting is for autotuning.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

T1-01

Autotuning mode selection

Set the autotuning mode.

2: Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only

4: PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning

(This selection is only for flux vector control for PM)

2, 4

2 * No No Yes Yes 701H

4-14

4-21

* The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. (The factory settings of open-loop vector control for PM are given. For flux vector control for PM, the setting is 4.)

Motor Constants For Autotuning: T2

Motor constants for autotuning are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

T2-01

Motor rated capacity

(E5-02 correspondence)

Sets the motor rated capacity according to the information on the motor name plate.

Only that or one frame smaller than the Inverter capacity can be set.

0.40 to

160.00

0.40 to

300.00

0.40

No No Yes Yes 730H

4-14

4-21

T2-02

T2-03

T2-04

Base speed

(E1-06 correspondence)

Sets the motor base speed according to the information on the motor name plate.

Only the value of 1750,1450, or 1150 min

-1

can be set.

1150 to

1750

Base voltage

(E1-13 correspondence)

Motor rated current

(E5-03 correspondence)

Sets the motor base voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor rated current according to the information on the motor name plate.

0.0 to

255.0

0.00 to

2000.0

1750 min

-1

190.0

1.65

No Yes Yes 731H

4-14

4-21

No Yes Yes 732H

4-14

4-21

No Yes Yes 733H

4-14

4-21

-60

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

T2-05

T2-06

Number of motor poles

(E5-04 correspondence)

Motor d axis inductance

(E5-06 correspondence)

Sets the number of motor poles according to the information on the motor name plate.

Sets the motor d-axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.

0.00 to

300.00

6 pole

54.84

Yes

734H

735H

T2-07

T2-08

T2-11

Motor q axis inductance

(E5-07 correspondence)

Sets the motor q-axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.

Motor induced voltage constant

(E5-09 correspondence)

Sets the motor induced voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.

Input voltage setting

(E1-01 correspondence)

Sets the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 V.

0.00 to

600.00

50.0 to

2000.0

155 to

255

64.10

223.0

mV x sec/rad

200 V

Yes

* 1. These are values for 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.

* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).

The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min

-1

) are given.

Yes

736H

737H

73AH

4-14

4-21

4-14

4-21

4-14

4-21

4-14

4-21

4-14

4-21

User Constant Tables

U: Monitor Constants

The following settings are made with the monitor constants (U constants): Setting constants for monitoring in drive mode.

Status Monitor Constants: U1

The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.

Constant

Number

U1-03

Name

U1-01

Speed reference

U1-02

Output frequency

Output current

Description

Monitors/sets the speed reference value.*

Monitors the output frequency.*

Monitors the output current.

(

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog

Output

10 V: Max. speed

− 10 to 10 V possible)

10 V: Max.speed

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

10 V: Inverter rated output current

(0 to +10 V, absolute value output)

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

MEMO

BUS

0.01

A A A 40H

0.01

A A A 41H

0.1 A A A A 42H

U1-04

Control method

Checks the current control method.

(Cannot be output.) A

U1-05 Motor speed

U1-06

Output voltage

Monitors the detected motor speed.*

10 V: Max. speed

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

Monitors the output voltage reference value in the

Inverter.

10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)

(0 to +10 V output)

U1-07

DC bus voltage

Monitors the main DC voltage in the Inverter.

10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)

(0 to +10 V output)

U1-08

Output power

Monitors the output power

(internally detected value).

10 V: Motor capacity (During closed loop vector control and open loop vector control for PM)

10 V: Inverter capacity

(Sequence test)

(max. applicable motor capacity)

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

U1-09

Torque reference

Monitor in internal torque reference value for vector control.

(

10 V: Motor rated torque

− 10 to 10 V possible)

* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).

0.01

0.1

VAC

VDC

0.1 kW

0.1%

A 43H

A 44H

A 45H

A 46H

A 47H

A 48H

-62

Constant

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog

Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

MEMO

BUS

U1-10

Input terminal status

Shows input ON/OFF status

U1-10=

1: FWD command

(S1) is ON.

1: REV command

(S2) is ON.

1: Multi input 1

(S3) is ON.

1: Multi input 2

(S4) is ON.

1: Multi input 3

(S5) is ON.

1: Multi input 4

(S6) is ON.

1: Multi input 5

(S7) is ON.

1: Multi input 6

(S8) is ON.

(Cannot be output.) A A A 49H

U1-11

Output terminal status

Shows output ON/OFF status.

U1-11=

1: Multi-function contact output 1

(M1-M2) is ON.

1: Multi-funtion contact output 2

(P1) is ON.

1: Multi-funtion contact output 3

(P2) is ON.

Not used (always 0).

1: Error output

(MA/MB-MC) is ON.

(Cannot be output.)

U1-12

Operation status

Inverter operating status.

U1-12=

1: Run

1: Zero speed

1: Reverse

1: Reset signal

input

1: Speed agree

1: Inverter

ready

1: Minor fault

(Cannot be output.) -

4AH

4BH

U1-13

1: Major fault

Cumulative operation time

Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.

The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.

U1-14

Software

No. (flash memory)

(Manufacturer’s ID number)

U1-15

U1-16

Terminal

A1 input voltage

Terminal

A2 input current

(voltage)

(Cannot be output.)

Monitors the input voltage of the voltage speed reference. An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.

(

10 V: 100% (10 V input)

− 10 to 10 V possible)

Monitors the input current of the multi-function analog input.

An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.

10 V: 100% (10 V input)

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

1 hr

0.1%

4CH

4DH

4EH

4FH

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog

Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

MEMO

BUS

U1-17

U1-18

U1-19

Terminal

A3 input voltage

Monitors the input voltage of the multi-function analog input.

An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.

10 V: 100% (10 V)

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

Motor qaxis current

(Iq)

Monitors the calculated value of the motor q-axis current.

The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.

10 V:Motor rated current

( − 10 to 10 V output)

Motor daxis current

(Id)

Monitors the calculated value of the motor d-axis current.

The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.

10 V:Motor rated current

( − 10 to 10 V output)

U1-20

Speed reference after soft-start

U1-21 ASR input

Monitors the speed reference after soft-start.

The speed reference given does not include compensations, such as slip compensation.

Monitors the input to the speed control loop.

The maximum speed corresponds to 100%.

10 V: Max. speed

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

10 V: Max. speed

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

U1-22 ASR output

U1-24

PID feedback value

U1-26

Output voltage reference (Vq)

U1-27

Output voltage reference (Vd)

Monitors the output from the speed control loop.

(Primary delay filter output value.)

The motor rated torque corresponds to 100%.

10 V: Motor rated torque

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

Monitors the feedback value when PID control is used.

The input for the maximum speed corresponds to

100%.

10 V: Max. speed

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor q-axis current control.

Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor d-axis current control.

(

10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)

− 10 to 10 V possible)

10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)

− 10 to 10 V possible)

U1-28

Software

No. (CPU)

(Manufacturer’s CPU software No.)

(Cannot be output.)

* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).

0.1%

0.01H

0.01

0.1

VAC

0.1

VAC

050H

51H

52H

53H

54H

55H

57H

59H

5AH

5BH

-64

Constant

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog

Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

MEMO

BUS

U1-29

U1-30

Output power lower

4 digits

Output power upper

5 digits

Monitors the Inverter’s output power. The display is split into upper digits and lower digits in the following way.

U1-30

kWH

U1-29

Example: If the output power is 12345678.9 kWh, the display will be as follows:

U1-29: 678.9 kWH

U1-30: 12345 MWH

(Cannot be output.)

U1-31 LED check

Lights all LEDs on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161).

(Cannot be output.)

U1-32

U1-33

ACR output of q axis

Monitors the current control output value for the motor q-axis current.

10 V: 100%

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

ACR output of d axis

Monitors the current control output value for the motor d-axis current.

10 V: 100%

( − 10 to 10 V possible)

U1-34

U1-36

U1-37

U1-38

OPE fault constant

PID input volume

PID output volume

PID target value

Shows the first constant number where an OPE fault was detected.

(Cannot be output.)

PID feedback volume

Given as maximum speed/

100%

(

10 V: Max. speed

− 10 to 10 V possible)

PID control output

Given as maximum speed/

100%

PID target value

Given as maximum speed/

100%

(

10 V: Max. speed

− 10 to 10 V possible)

10 V: Max. speed

U1-39

U1-40

MEMO-

BUS communications error code

Shows MEMOBUS errors.

U1-39=

1: CRC error

1: Data length error

Not used (always 0).

1: Parity

error

1: Overrun

error

1: Framing

error

1: Timeout

Not used (always 0).

Cooling fan operating time

Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan.

The time can be set in 02-

10.

(Cannot be output.)

0.1 kWH

0.1

0.01

1 hr

5CH

5DH

3CH

5FH

60H

61H

63H

64H

65H

66H

67H

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog

Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

MEMO

BUS

U1-44

U1-61

U1-63

U1-68

U1-69

U1-78

ASR output

Monitors output from the speed control loop.

(Primary delay filter input value)

Displays 100% at the motor rated current.

Electrolytic capacitor maintenance

Displays the estimated time for the electrolytic capacitor maintenance in % units.

(Can be set in o2-18.)

(100% is the estimated time for replacement.)

Cooling fan maintenance timer

(100% is the estimated time for replacement.)

Lead-in phase compensation

( Δθ cmp)

Control shaft displacement volume

( Δθ )

Magnetic pole position detected value (with

PG)

Displays the compensation volume estimated by the shaft displacement calculation.

Displays the displacement volume between γ, δ shaft for motor control and actual d, q shaft.

Monitors the magnetic pole position detected value

(Sensor)

10 V: Motor rated current

( − 10 to 10 V)

(Cannot be output.)

− 5 to 5 V: − 180 to 180 deg

(Output absolute value, if 0 to 10 V is output.)

− 5 to 5 V: − 180 to 180 deg

(Output absolute value, if 0 to 10 V is output.)

10 V/360 deg

0.01

0.1 deg

0.1

deg

6BH

7CH

7EH

7C0H

7C1H

7CAH

-66

Fault Trace: U2

User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level

During Multi-Function

Analog Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

MEMO

BUS

U2-01

U2-02

Current fault

Previous fault

The contents of the current fault.

The contents of the error that occurred just prior to the current fault.

U2-03

Speed reference at fault

The speed reference when the previous fault occurred.

U2-04

Output frequency at fault

U2-05

Output current at fault

The output frequency when the previous fault occurred.

The output current when the previous fault occurred.

U2-06

Motor speed at fault

The motor speed when the previous fault occurred.

U2-07

U2-08

Output voltage reference at fault

The output reference voltage when the previous fault occurred.

DC bus voltage at fault

The main current DC voltage when the previous fault occurred.

U2-09

U2-10

U2-11

U2-12

Output power at fault

The output power when the previous fault occurred.

Torque reference at fault

The reference torque when the previous fault occurred. The motor rated torque corresponds to 100%.

Input terminal status at fault

The input terminal status when the previous fault occurred.

The format is the same as for

U1-10.

Output terminal status at fault

The output terminal status when the previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.

U2-13

U2-14

Operation status at fault

Cumulative operation time at fault

The operating status when the previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.

The operating time when the previous fault occurred.

(Cannot be output.)

0.01

0.1 A

0.01

0.1 V

1 V

0.1 kW

0.1%

1 hr

80H

81H

82H

83H

84H

85H

86H

87H

88H

89H

8AH

8BH

8CH

8DH

User Constant Tables

Constant

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level

During Multi-Function

Analog Output

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for

Open

Loop

Vector for

MEMO

BUS

U2-15

Speed reference after soft-start at fault

The Speed reference after softstart when the previous fault occurs.

Displays the same state as U1-

20.

0.01

No A

U2-16

U2-17

Motor qaxis inductance at fault

Motor daxis inductance at fault

The Motor q-axis inductance when the previous fault occurs.

Displays the same state as U1-

18.

The Motor d-axis inductance when the previous fault occurs.

Displays the same state as U1-

19.

U2-18

ASR output

2 at fault

The ASR output 2 when the previous fault occurs.

Displays the same state as U1-

44.

(Cannot be output.)

0.1%

0.01

U2-20

Heatsink temperature at fault

The Heatsink temperature when the previous fault occurs.

1 ° C

U2-30

Control shaft displacement volume

( Δθ ) at fault

The Control shaft displacement volume ( Δθ ) when the previous fault occurs.

Displays the same state as U1-

69.

Note: The following faults are not included in the fault trace: CPF00, CPF01, CPF02, CPF03, UV1, and UV2.

0.1

deg

7E0H

7E1H

7E2H

7E3H

8EH

7EFH

-68

Fault History: U3

User constants for the error log are shown in the following table.

Constant

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog

Output

U3-01

Most recent fault

The error contents of 1st previous fault.

U3-02

U3-03

U3-04

U3-05

Second most recent fault

Third most recent fault

The error contents of 2nd previous fault.

The error contents of 3rd previous fault.

Fourth most recent fault

The error contents of 4th previous fault.

Cumulative operation time at fault

The total operating time when the 1st previous fault occurred.

(Cannot be output.)

1 hr

U3-06

U3-07

Accumulated time of second fault

The total operating time when the 2nd previous fault occurred.

Accumulated time of third fault

The total operating time when the 3rd previous fault occurred.

1 hr

U3-08

Accumulated time of fourth fault

The total operating time when the 4th previous fault occurred.

Note: The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, CPF01, CPF02, CPF03, UV1, and UV2.

1 hr

Min.

Unit

Control Methods

Sequences test

Flux

Vector

Open

Loop

Vector

MEMO

BUS

90H

91H

92H

93H

94H

95H

96H

97H

User Constant Tables

Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)

The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.

Constant

No.

Name Unit

Sequence test

A1-02=0

Factory setting

Open-loop vector control for

A1-02=6

Flux vector control for PM

A1-02=7 b2-01

Zero-speed level (Baseblock starting speed)

C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1

C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2

C5-06 ASR primary delay time

C6-02 Carrier frequency selection

E1-09 Min. speed

F4-01 Channel 1 monitor selection

H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM)

L1-01 Motor protection selection

T1-01 Autotuning mode selection

1.5 Hz

0.5

20.00

0.004

1 (2 kHz)

30 min

-1

1.0

10.00

0.016

2 (4 kHz)

10% of the base speed of motor

(E1-06)

-70

Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.

200 V Class

Constant

No.

Name

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

E5-01 Motor capacity selection

C6-01 CT/VT selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

(when VT is selected)

*1 *2 *3

Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-02 Motor rated slip

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L2-02

Momentary power loss ridethru time

L2-03 Min. baseblock time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

Constant

No.

Name

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

E5-01 Motor capacity selection

C6-01 CT/VT selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

(when VT is selected)

*1 *2 *3

Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-02 Motor rated slip

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

Unit kW

s s

° C

Factory setting

0.40

0.75

1.50

2.20

3.70

5.50

7.50

0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1.90

2.90

1.20

3.30

2.50

1.80

6.20

2.60

2.80

8.50

2.90

3.00

14.00

2.73

4.50

19.60

1.50

5.10

26.60

1.30

8.00

9.842

5.156

1.997

1.601

0.771

0.399

0.288

14 26 53 77 112 172 262

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

100

0.5

1.0

0.6

1.0

0.7

Factory setting

11.00

15.00

18.50

22.00

30.00

37.00

45.00

07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D

0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2

39.7

1.70

11.2

53.0

1.60

15.2

65.8

1.67

15.7

77.2

1.70

18.5

105.0

1.80

21.9

131.0

1.33

38.2

160.0

1.60

44.0

0.230

0.138

0.101

0.079

0.064

0.039

0.030

245 272 505 538 699 823 852

User Constant Tables

Constant

No.

Name

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

L2-02

Momentary power loss ridethru time

L2-03 Min. baseblock time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

Unit kW

Factory setting

11.00

15.00

18.50

22.00

30.00

37.00

45.00

07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D

1.0

2.0

0.7

2.0

0.7

2.0

° C

0.8

0.9

1.0

100

1.0

1.1

1.2

100

Constant

No.

Name

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

E5-01 Motor capacity selection

C6-01 CT/VT selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

(when VT is selected)

*1 *2 *3

Unit kW

Factory setting

55.00

75.00

000E 000F

E2-10

L2-02

Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-02 Motor rated slip

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

Momentary power loss ridethru time

190.0

1.43

45.6

260.0

1.39

72.0

0.022

0.023

960

0.7

1200

0.7

L2-03 Min. baseblock time s 1.2

1.3

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level ° C 105 110

* 1. The setting of C6-02 determines the carrier frequencies as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz, 6: 12.0 kHz

* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The factory settings of open-loop vector control for PM are given.

For flux vector control for PM, the setting would be 1 (2 kHZ).

* 3. The factory settings and upper limits vary in accordance with the CT/VT selection (C6-01). If C6-01=0 (CT), both factory settings and upper limits are

1 (2 kHz).

* 4. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 6 (12.0 kHz).]

* 5. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 4 (8.0 kHz).]

* 6. For a 200 V Class Inverter of 30 kW or more, reduce the Inverter rated current if carrier frequency must be set to a larger value than the factory setting.

-72

400 V Class

Constant

No.

Name

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

E5-01 Motor capacity selection

C6-01 CT/VT selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

(when VT is selected) *1 *2 *3

Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-02 Motor rated slip

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L2-02

Momentary power loss ridethru time

L2-03 Min. baseblock time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

Constant

No.

Name

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

E5-01 Motor capacity selection

C6-01 CT/VT selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

(when VT is selected)

*1 *2 *3

Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-02 Motor rated slip

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L2-02

Momentary power loss ridethru time

L2-03 Min. baseblock time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

Unit kW

s s

° C

Unit kW

s s

° C

Factory setting

0.40

0.75

1.50

2.20

3.70

5.50

7.50

20 21 22 23 24 26 27

0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0026 0027

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1.00

2.90

0.60

1.60

2.60

0.80

3.10

2.50

1.40

4.20

3.00

1.50

7.00

2.70

2.30

9.80

1.50

2.60

13.30

1.30

4.00

38.198 22.459 10.100

6.495

3.333

1.595

1.152

14 26 53 77 130 193 263

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.8

0.6

0.8

0.7

Factory setting

11.00

15.00

18.50

22.00

30.00

37.00

45.00

28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E

0028 0029 002A 002B 002C 002D 002E

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2

19.9

1.70

5.6

26.5

1.60

7.6

32.9

1.67

7.8

38.6

1.70

9.2

52.3

1.80

10.9

65.6

1.33

19.1

79.7

1.60

22.0

0.922

0.550

0.403

0.316

0.269

0.155

0.122

385 440 508 586 750 925 1125

1.0

0.8

2.0

0.9

2.0

1.0

0.7

1.0

2.0

1.1

0.7

1.1

2.0

1.2

User Constant Tables

Constant

No.

Name

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

E5-01 Motor capacity selection

C6-01 CT/VT selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

(when VT is selected) *1 *2 *3

Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-02 Motor rated slip

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

L2-02

Momentary power loss ridethru time

L2-03 Min. baseblock time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

Unit kW

s s

° C

Factory setting

55.00

75.00

90.00 110.00 132.00 160.00

2F 30 31 32 33 34

002F 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034

1 1 1 1 1 1

0.7

1.2

0.7

1.3

2.0

1.5

108

2.0

1.7

100

2.0

1.7

110

95.0

130.0

156.0

190.0

223.0

270.0

1.46

24.0

1.39

36.0

1.40

40.0

1.40

49.0

1.38

58.0

1.35

70.0

0.088

0.092

0.056

0.046

0.035

0.029

1260 1600 1760 2150 2350 2850

2.0

1.8

108

-74

Constant

No.

Name Unit Factory setting

Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection

E5-01 Motor capacity selection kW

185.00 220.00 300.00

0034 0035 0037

C6-01 CT/VT selection 1 1

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

(when VT is selected)

*1 *2 *3

Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)

E2-01 Motor rated current

1 2

*10

310.0

370.0

500.0

E2-02 Motor rated slip

E2-03 Motor no-load current

1.30

81.0

1.30

96.0

1.25

130.0

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

E2-10

Motor iron loss for torque compensation

0.025

3200

0.020

3700

0.014

4700

L2-02

Momentary power loss ridethru time

L2-03 Min. baseblock time s 2.0

2.0

s 1.9

2.0

2.1

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level ° C 95 100 108

* 1. The setting of C6-02 determines the carrier frequencies as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz, 6: 12.0 kHz.

* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The factory settings of open-loop vector control for PM are given.

For flux vector control for PM, the setting would be 1 (2 kHZ).

* 3. The factory settings and upper limits vary in accordance with the CT/VT selection (C6-01). If C6-01=0 (CT), both factory settings and upper limits are

1 (2 kHz).

* 4. For 220 and 300 kW Inverters, C6-01 is fixed value 1 (VT).

* 5. In open-loop vector control for PM, capacity selection cannot be performed.

* 6. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 6 (12.0 kHz).]

* 7. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 4 (8.0 kHz).]

* 8. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 2 (4.0 kHz).]

* 9. For a 400 V Class Inverter of 30 kW or more, reduce the Inverter rated current if carrier frequency must be set to a larger value than the factory setting

* 10. In software PRG 1040, the setting is fixed to 1 (2 kHz). In software PRG 1041 or later, settings 1 (2 kHz) and 2 (4 kHz) are selectable.

User Constant Tables

Factory Settings that Change with Inverter Capacity Selection (o2-04) and

Motor Capacity Selection (E5-01)

200 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1750 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 000 001 002 003 004

E1-04

E1-06

Max. speed

Base speed min

-1 min

-1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1750

175

190.0

1.65

8.233

54.84

64.10

233.0

1750

175

190.0

2.97

2.284

23.02

29.89

229.5

1750

175

190.0

5.50

1.501

17.08

21.39

250.9

1750

175

190.0

8.10

0.827

8.61

13.50

247.9

1750

175

190.0

13.40

0.455

7.20

10.02

248.6

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01 Motor capacity selection

Unit kW

E1-04

E1-06

Max. speed

Base speed min

-1 min

-1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

11.00

007

1750

175

190.0

39.7

0.094

3.40

3.91

249.3

15.00

008

1750

175

190.0

53.2

0.066

2.65

3.11

266.6

175

190.0

65.5

0.052

2.17

2.55

265.1

18.50

009

1750

Factory setting

22.00

00A

1750

30.00

00B

1750

1750 1750 1750

175

190.0

77.4

0.037

1.71

2.06

262.9

175

190.0

100.2

0.030

1.34

1.78

291.2

45.00

00D

1750

175

190.0

155.9

0.014

0.83

1.05

271.6

37.00

00C

1750

175

190.0

126.4

0.020

0.99

1.28

275.2

5.50

005

1750

175

190.0

19.80

0.246

4.86

7.43

249.6

7.50

006

1750

175

190.0

27.00

0.198

4.15

5.91

269.0

-76

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min

-1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min -1

E5-04 Number of motor poles

E5-05

E5-07

Motor armature resistance

E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

Motor q axis inductance pole

Ω mH mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Factory setting

55.00

00E

1750

75.00

00F

1750

175

190.0

186.2

0.012

0.81

1.22

299.6

1750

175

190.0

259.8

0.006

0.44

0.56

259.6

User Constant Tables

400 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1750 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 020 021 022 023 024

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1750

175

1750

175

380.0

0.83

32.932

380.0

1.49

9.136

219.36

92.08

256.40

119.56

466.0

459.0

1750

175

380.0

2.75

6.004

68.32

85.56

501.8

1750

175

380.0

4.05

3.297

40.39

48.82

485.7

1750

175

380.0

6.80

1.798

32.93

37.70

498.7

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

11.00

028

1750

175

380.0

19.9

0.368

13.38

16.99

508.7

55.00

02F

1750

175

380.0

89.0

0.049

3.16

3.88

649.8

75.00

030

1750

175

380.0

121.5

0.029

2.12

2.61

619.3

15.00

029

1750

175

380.0

26.4

0.263

10.51

12.77

531.9

175

380.0

32.1

0.202

8.56

11.22

536.4

18.50

02A

1750

Factory setting

22.00

02B

1750

30.00

02C

1750

175

380.0

38.7

0.148

6.84

8.24

525.8

175

380.0

49.9

0.235

5.40

7.26

585.1

175

380.0

152.0

0.019

1.52

2.53

543.0

Factory setting

90.00

110.00

132.00

160.00

031 032 033 034

1750 1750 1750 1750

175

380.0

181.0

0.016

1.46

2.27

589.9

175

380.0

219.0

0.011

1.12

1.74

567.4

175

380.0

255.0

0.008

0.95

1.48

627.7

5.50

026

1750

175

380.0

9.90

0.982

22.70

26.80

498.0

37.00

02D

1750

175

380.0

63.2

0.076

3.96

5.12

555.2

45.00

02E

1750

175

380.0

74.4

0.054

3.36

3.94

581.4

7.50

027

1750

175

380.0

13.10

0.786

16.49

23.46

541.7

-78

200 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1450 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 100 101 102 103 104

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1450

145

190.0

1.78

4.405

26.62

41.70

262.6

1450

145

190.0

3.12

2.425

19.14

29.98

276.3

1450

145

190.0

5.88

1.647

14.53

19.98

291.0

1450

145

190.0

8.00

0.665

12.27

14.77

299.1

1450

145

190.0

14.10

0.462

7.10

10.14

294.3

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name Unit

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01 Motor capacity selection kW

E1-04

E1-06

Max. speed

Base speed min

-1 min

-1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Factory setting

55.00

10E

1450

145

190.0

172.7

0.016

0.83

1.30

362.8

11.00

107

1450

145

190.0

38.0

0.099

4.07

5.25

316.6

15.00

108

1450

145

190.0

53.3

0.075

3.29

4.57

332.2

145

190.0

63.0

0.057

2.53

3.01

313.4

Factory setting

18.50

109

1450

22.00

10A

1450

30.00

10B

1450

145

190.0

75.0

0.041

2.02

2.70

326.1

145

190.0

100.8

0.034

1.75

2.17

369.0

45.00

10D

1450

145

190.0

148.6

0.021

0.99

1.54

331.7

37.00

10C

1450

145

190.0

124.4

0.028

1.18

1.84

323.1

5.50

105

1450

145

190.0

20.00

0.341

5.90

8.42

306.6

7.50

106

1450

145

190.0

26.60

0.184

6.91

8.37

325.1

User Constant Tables

400 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1450 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 120 121 122 123 124

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1450

145

1450

145

380.0

0.89

17.620

380.0

1.50

7.421

106.50

85.11

166.80

113.19

525.2

566.9

1450

145

380.0

2.70

4.825

58.87

80.59

592.2

1450

145

380.0

4.10

2.656

46.42

60.32

579.4

1450

145

380.0

6.70

1.353

31.73

40.45

586.4

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

11.00

128

1450

145

380.0

18.7

0.396

15.22

19.63

643.5

55.00

12F

1450

145

380.0

89.8

0.048

3.39

4.66

716.5

15.00

129

1450

145

380.0

26.3

0.295

12.65

15.87

650.6

145

380.0

31.6

0.223

9.87

12.40

635.8

18.50

12A

1450

Factory setting

22.00

12B

1450

30.00

12C

1450

145

380.0

36.1

0.165

7.92

10.38

728.2

145

380.0

49.8

0.136

7.11

9.03

735.6

145

380.0

127.0

0.027

2.19

3.64

651.6

75.00

130

1450

Factory setting

90.00

131

1450

110.00

132

1450

132.00

133

1450

145

380.0

148.0

0.023

2.11

3.27

707.7

145

380.0

181.0

0.018

1.76

2.72

709.1

145

380.0

214.0

0.010

1.20

1.88

706.2

37.00

12D

1450

145

380.0

60.7

0.093

5.93

6.79

770.0

5.50

126

1450

145

380.0

9.80

0.999

26.20

30.94

612.1

45.00

12E

1450

145

380.0

73.3

0.059

4.06

5.22

727.5

7.50

127

1450

145

380.0

13.30

0.713

27.06

33.45

640.4

-80

200 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1150 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 200 201 202 203 204

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1150

115

190.0

1.74

6.763

42.88

67.17

333.3

1150

115

190.0

3.17

3.660

28.59

44.78

337.7

1150

115

190.0

5.90

1.480

17.64

24.23

365.5

1150

115

190.0

8.84

0.696

10.40

14.85

356.2

1150

115

190.0

13.70

0.412

7.94

11.86

359.2

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

15.00

208

1150

115

190.0

53.4

0.084

3.83

4.65

387.6

11.00

207

1150

115

190.0

38.6

0.149

4.49

6.82

389.8

115

190.0

63.8

0.083

2.78

4.39

392.6

Factory setting

18.50

209

1150

22.00

20A

1150

30.00

20B

1150

115

190.0

74.1

0.048

2.38

3.15

453.2

115

190.0

100.6

0.046

1.91

2.98

411.2

45.00

20D

1150

115

190.0

148.9

0.021

1.09

1.70

414.7

37.00

20C

1150

115

190.0

124.7

0.032

1.47

2.30

405.5

5.50

205

1150

115

190.0

18.60

0.414

10.60

14.92

428.2

7.50

206

1150

115

190.0

25.80

0.262

7.53

10.97

410.0

User Constant Tables

400V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1150 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 220 221 222 223 224

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1150

115

1150

115

380.0

0.87

380.0

1.59

6 6

27.050

14.640

171.50

114.40

268.70

179.10

666.9

675.5

1150

115

380.0

2.95

5.921

70.56

96.90

731.0

1150

115

380.0

4.42

2.783

41.61

59.41

712.4

1150

115

380.0

6.80

1.480

38.39

47.65

792.7

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

11.00

228

1150

115

380.0

19.1

0.443

18.84

24.68

805.4

55.00

22F

1150

115

380.0

90.6

0.049

3.89

6.46

868.5

15.00

229

1150

115

380.0

26.7

0.334

15.27

18.56

796.4

115

380.0

127.0

0.032

2.87

4.45

825.5

Factory setting

75.00

230

1150

90.00

231

1150

110.00

232

1150

115

380.0

151.0

0.026

2.53

3.92

850.8

115

380.0

181.0

0.015

1.79

2.80

863.3

115

380.0

31.9

0.332

11.10

17.56

785.1

18.50

22A

1150

Factory setting

22.00

22B

1150

30.00

22C

1150

115

380.0

37.0

0.261

9.41

14.89

811.4

115

380.0

49.4

0.134

8.04

9.63

897.6

45.00

22E

1150

115

380.0

74.4

0.086

4.36

6.80

829.6

37.00

22D

1150

115

380.0

62.3

0.129

5.89

9.18

811.0

5.50

226

1150

115

380.0

9.70

1.220

45.97

56.26

859.9

7.50

227

1150

115

380.0

12.60

0.655

25.46

33.63

820.2

-82

200 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1750 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 000 001 002 003 004

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1750

190.0

1.60

2.236

16.75

27.63

211.0

1750

190.0

3.20

1.146

10.30

16.68

208.0

1750

190.0

6.00

0.774

6.13

10.05

226.0

1750

190.0

8.20

0.475

6.63

10.35

235.5

1750

190.0

13.40

0.237

4.45

6.90

245.0

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

190.0

186.0

0.009

0.51

0.79

267.0

Factory setting

55.00

00E

1750

75.00

00F

1750

190.0

252.0

0.006

0.37

0.57

267.0

7.50

006

1750

190.0

25.00

0.161

3.30

4.93

241.5

5.50

005

1750

190.0

18.80

0.268

4.98

7.30

251.0

11.00

007

1750

15.00

008

1750

Factory setting

18.50

009

22.00

00A

1750

30.00

00B

1750

37.00

00C

1750

45.00

00D

1750

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

190.0

38.0 52.0 64.0 74.0 99.0 126.0 149.0

0.110

0.071

0.049

0.040

0.030

0.019

0.013

3.40

4.78

262.5

2.41

3.45

257.5

1.86

2.70

251.0

1.66

2.41

262.5

1.15

1.64

285.0

0.81

1.17

277.0

0.68

1.03

275.0

User Constant Tables

400V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1750 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 020 021 022 023 024

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1750

380.0

0.80

8.945

380.0

1.60

4.584

67.00

41.20

110.50

66.70

422.0

416.0

1750

380.0

3.00

3.095

24.50

40.20

452.0

1750

380.0

4.10

1.901

26.50

41.40

471.0

1750

380.0

6.70

0.949

17.80

27.60

490.0

5.50

026

1750

380.0

9.40

1.070

19.90

29.20

502.0

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min

-1 min

-1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min -1

V000000

E5-04 Number of motor poles

E5-05

E5-07

Motor armature resistance

E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

Motor q axis inductance pole

Ω mH mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

11.00

028

1750

15.00

029

1750

18.50

02A

1750

Factory setting

22.00

02B

1750

30.00

02C

1750

37.00

02D

1750

45.00

02E

1750

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

380.0

19.0 26.0 32.0 37.0 49.5 63.0 74.5

0.438

0.283

0.194

0.161

0.118

0.077

0.052

13.60

19.10

525.0

9.63

13.80

515.0

7.43

10.80

502.0

6.65

9.65

525.0

4.58

6.54

570.0

3.22

4.68

554.0

2.70

4.10

550.0

55.00

02F

1750

75.00

030

1750

90.00

110.00

132.00

160.00

200.00

031

1750

Factory setting

032

1750

033

1750

034

1750

035

1750

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

380.0

93.0 126.0 145.0 180.0 220.0 260.0 340.0

0.036

0.023

0.019

0.016

0.011

0.008

0.004

2.04

3.14

534.0

1.46

2.27

534.0

1.46

2.38

545.0

1.40

2.05

614.0

1.08

1.59

563.0

0.88

1.42

613.0

0.62

1.00

588.0

7.50

027

1750

380.0

12.50

0.645

13.20

19.70

483.0

-84

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min

-1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min -1

E5-04 Number of motor poles

E5-05

E5-07

Motor armature resistance

E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

Motor q axis inductance pole

Ω mH mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Factory setting

250.00

300.00

036 037

1750 1750

1750

380.0

420.0

0.004

0.68

0.79

607.0

1750

380.0

500.0

0.002

0.41

0.57

505.0

User Constant Tables

200 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1450 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 100 101 102 103 104

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1450

190.0

1.50

3.160

23.68

33.75

258.0

1450

190.0

3.00

1.834

17.13

26.75

268.0

1450

190.0

5.40

0.686

9.10

14.48

282.5

1450

190.0

8.00

0.305

5.65

8.90

271.5

1450

190.0

13.80

0.378

6.90

10.20

302.0

5.50

105

1450

190.0

19.40

0.278

5.93

9.05

322.0

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Factory setting

55.00

10E

1450

75.00

10F

1450

30 30

190.0

184.0 240.0

0.012

0.007

0.72

1.09

374.5

0.53

0.86

327.0

11.00

107

1450

15.00

108

1450

18.50

109

1450

Factory setting

22.00

10A

1450

30.00

10B

1450

37.00

10C

1450

45.00

10D

1450

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

190.0

39.0 53.0 66.0 73.0 101.0 127.0 151.0

0.057

0.073

0.055

0.047

0.033

0.023

0.018

3.35

4.90

303.5

2.80

3.95

310.5

2.23

3.15

303.5

1.79

2.55

369.5

1.43

1.96

369.5

1.20

1.70

367.0

0.84

1.25

344.0

7.50

106

1450

190.0

26.00

0.176

5.53

8.10

334.0

-86

400 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1450 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 120 121 122 123 124

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1450

380.0

0.75

12.640

380.0

1.50

7.336

94.70

68.50

135.00

107.00

516.0

536.0

1450

380.0

2.70

2.745

36.40

57.90

565.0

1450

380.0

4.00

1.220

22.60

35.60

543.0

1450

380.0

6.90

1.511

27.60

40.80

604.0

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

55.00

12F

1450

75.00

130

1450

90.00

110.00

132.00

160.00

200.00

131 132 133 134 135

1450

Factory setting

1450

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

380.0

92.0 120.0 145.0 184.0 215.0 255.0 340.00

0.047

0.028

0.024

0.015

0.011

0.007

0.006

2.86

4.36

749.0

2.11

3.43

654.0

2.02

2.89

738.0

1.36

2.08

664.0

1.11

1.84

705.0

0.85

1.51

686.0

0.94

1.14

708.0

7.50

127

1450

380.0

13.00

0.704

22.10

32.40

668.0

5.50

126

1450

380.0

9.70

1.113

23.70

36.20

644.0

11.00

128

1450

15.00

129

1450

Factory setting

18.50

12A

22.00

12B

1450

30.00

12C

1450

37.00

12D

1450

45.00

12E

1450

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

380.0

19.5 26.5 33.0 36.5 50.5 63.5 75.5

0.228

0.292

0.220

0.188

0.133

0.091

0.072

13.40

19.60

607.0

11.20

15.80

621.0

8.90

12.60

607.0

7.15

10.20

739.0

5.70

7.83

739.0

4.78

6.78

734.0

3.37

5.00

688.0

Constant

No.

E5-02

E5-01

E1-04 Max. speed

Name

Motor rated capacity

Motor capacity selection

Unit kW

min -1

Factory setting

250.00

136

1450

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

1450

380.0

420.0

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH

0.003

E5-06 Motor d axis inductance 0.64

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH 0.87

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad 674.0

User Constant Tables

-88

200 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1150 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 200 201 202 203 204

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1150

190.0

1.50

2.708

25.25

41.50

327.5

1150

190.0

2.80

1.511

16.15

26.00

328.5

1150

190.0

5.60

1.084

14.33

21.68

353.5

1150

190.0

8.40

0.540

10.00

15.68

362.5

1150

190.0

13.40

0.358

7.48

11.45

362.5

Constant No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

190.0

179.0

0.013

0.94

1.51

436.0

Factory setting

55.00

20E

1150

75.00

20F

1150

190.0

250.0

0.008

0.69

1.02

430.5

7.50

206

1150

190.0

26.00

0.162

5.45

8.58

386.0

5.50

205

1150

190.0

19.20

0.299

9.15

13.50

430.0

11.00

207

1150

15.00

208

1150

Factory setting

18.50

209

22.00

20A

1150

30.00

20B

1150

37.00

20C

1150

45.00

20D

1150

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

190.0

40.0 54.0 63.0 75.0 100.0 126.0 150.0

0.129

0.081

0.065

0.052

0.036

0.026

0.019

4.20

6.33

379.0

3.35

4.90

372.5

2.58

3.73

443.0

2.23

3.28

461.5

1.87

2.73

458.5

1.50

2.17

458.5

1.18

1.80

481.5

User Constant Tables

400 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1150 min

-1

)

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

Unit kW 0.40

0.75

1.50

Factory setting

2.20

3.70

E5-01 Motor capacity selection 220 221 222 223 224

E1-04 Max. speed min -1

E1-06

E1-09

Base speed

Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor rated current min

-1 min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

1150

380.0

0.75

10.830

380.0

1.40

6.044

101.00

64.60

166.00

104.00

655.0

657.0

1150

380.0

2.80

4.336

57.32

86.70

707.0

1150

380.0

4.20

2.161

40.00

62.72

725.0

1150

380.0

6.70

1.431

29.90

45.80

725.0

5.50

226

1150

380.0

9.60

1.197

36.60

54.00

860.0

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min -1 min -1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min

-1

E5-04

E5-05

Number of motor poles

Motor armature resistance pole

Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

Constant

No.

Name

E5-02 Motor rated capacity

E5-01

E1-04

E1-06

Motor capacity selection

Max. speed

Base speed

Unit kW

min

-1 min

-1

E1-09 Min. speed

E1-13 Base voltage

E5-03 Motor current min -1

E5-04 Number of motor poles

E5-05

E5-07

Motor armature resistance

E5-06 Motor d axis inductance

Motor q axis inductance pole

Ω mH mH

E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad

11.00

228

1150

15.00

229

1150

18.50

22A

1150

Factory setting

22.00

22B

1150

30.00

22C

1150

37.00

22D

1150

45.00

22E

1150

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

380.0

20.0 27.0 31.5 37.5 50.0 63.0 75.0

0.517

0.325

0.261

0.207

0.142

0.104

0.074

16.80

25.30

758.0

13.40

19.60

745.0

10.30

14.90

886.0

8.90

13.10

923.0

7.49

10.90

917.0

5.99

8.67

917.0

4.73

7.18

963.0

55.00

22F

1150

75.00

230

1150

90.00

110.00

132.00

160.00

200.00

231

1150

Factory setting

232

1150

233

1150

234

1150

235

1150

30 30 30 30 30 30 30

380.0

89.5 125.0 150.0 180.0 215.0 250.0 320.0

0.051

0.033

0.026

0.015

0.012

0.009

0.007

3.74

6.02

872.0

2.75

4.07

861.0

2.42

3.61

885.0

1.66

2.73

862.0

1.39

2.28

882.0

1.55

1.92

911.0

1.25

1.53

944.0

7.50

227

1150

380.0

13.00

0.648

21.80

34.30

772.0

Constant Settings by

Function

Application and Overload Selections ...........................6-2

Speed Reference .........................................................6-5

Run Command...........................................................6-14

Stopping Methods ......................................................6-16

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-20

Adjusting Speed References .....................................6-27

Speed Limit (Speed Reference Limit Function) .........6-33

Machine Protection ....................................................6-35

Continuing Operation.................................................6-51

Inverter Protection .....................................................6-61

Input Terminal Functions............................................6-63

Output Terminal Functions.........................................6-73

Monitor Constants......................................................6-76

Individual Functions ...................................................6-81

Digital Operator Functions ....................................... 6-119

Options ....................................................................6-129

Maintenance Timer Display Function

(SPEC: C or Later Only) ...........................................6-140

-2

Application and Overload Selections

Select the Overload to Suit the Application

Set C6-01 (CT: Low carrier constant torque, VT: High carrier variable torque) depending on the application for which the Inverter is used. The setting ranges for the Inverter carrier frequency, and overload tolerance depend on the setting in C6-01.

Related Constants

Constant

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Control Methods

Sequence

Test

Flux

Vector for PM

Open

Loop

Vector for PM

MEMO

BUS

Page

C6-01

CT/VT selection

0: Low carrier, constant torque

(CT)

1: High carrier, variable torque

(VT)

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

Select carrier frequency.

1: 2 kHz

2: 4 kHz

3: 6 kHz

4: 8 kHz

6: 12 kHz

0 or 1

1 or 2

1 to 6

*4 *6

*1 *5

223H

224H